WO2022214006A1 - 一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置 - Google Patents

一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022214006A1
WO2022214006A1 PCT/CN2022/085420 CN2022085420W WO2022214006A1 WO 2022214006 A1 WO2022214006 A1 WO 2022214006A1 CN 2022085420 W CN2022085420 W CN 2022085420W WO 2022214006 A1 WO2022214006 A1 WO 2022214006A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
uplink channel
hop
transmission mode
symbols
sending
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/085420
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张战战
铁晓磊
花梦
罗之虎
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022214006A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022214006A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453—Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a method for sending and receiving an uplink channel, and a communication device.
  • a terminal device when a terminal device performs information reception or information transmission within a frequency range that does not exceed the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device, frequency tuning is not required. However, if a terminal device performs information reception or information transmission in a frequency range that exceeds the terminal device's maximum channel bandwidth, the terminal device needs frequency tuning to perform information reception or information transmission in a larger frequency range.
  • the low-complexity terminal device For low-complexity terminal devices, such as massive machine type communications (mMTC) devices, due to the limited bandwidth capability of low-complexity terminal devices, the low-complexity terminal device exceeds the maximum capacity of the low-complexity terminal device.
  • mMTC massive machine type communications
  • the low-complexity terminal device When transmitting uplink information within the frequency range of the channel bandwidth, the low-complexity terminal device needs M symbols to perform frequency tuning. Therefore, the transmission of the uplink information cannot be sent at the tuning time of the M symbols, which will lead to a decrease in the performance of the low-complexity terminal equipment for transmitting the uplink information.
  • the present application provides a PUCCH sending method, receiving method and communication apparatus, so as to reduce the performance degradation of PUCCH transmission of low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • a method for sending PUCCH is provided.
  • the method can be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting functions required by the communication device to implement the method, such as a chip system.
  • the following description will be given by taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the target transmission mode is one of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, or the third transmission mode provided in this embodiment of the application.
  • the first transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used for sending the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for sending the second hop are different.
  • the number of symbols to include, n, m, and h are positive integers. It should be understood that the first hop and the second hop belong to the same uplink channel.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment can determine the number of the starting symbol of the second hop of PUCCH and the time slot used by normal terminal equipment.
  • the numbers of the start symbols of the second hop when the PUCCH is sent in the intra-frequency hopping transmission mode are the same.
  • network devices can uniformly configure common PUCCH resources (formats) through system messages, and there is no need to configure separate PUCCH formats for low-complexity terminal devices, which can reduce signaling overhead and resource overhead.
  • the position of candidate PUCCH symbols in each time slot remains unchanged, which can reduce the resources used for sending PUCCH, and will not occupy resources allocated for other terminal equipment.
  • the second transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used for sending the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for sending the second hop are different.
  • the last symbol of the symbols used to transmit the first hop and the first symbol of the symbols used to transmit the second hop are separated by X symbols, m is a positive integer, and h is 0 or positive Integer.
  • X is related to L and N, and/or X is related to subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel
  • N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning. It should be understood that the first hop and the second hop belong to the same uplink channel.
  • the second transmission mode provided by this embodiment of the present application is similar to the first transmission mode.
  • the uplink channel is sent within the threshold range, and frequency tuning can also be performed within X symbols. In this way, the impact on the transmission of the uplink channel can be reduced, and the transmission performance of the uplink channel of the low-complexity terminal equipment can be avoided as much as possible.
  • X may be less than 14, that is, the first hop of the upstream channel and the second hop of the upstream channel may be located in the same time slot. In this way, the delay in sending the uplink channel can be reduced.
  • the third transmission mode is: in the mth time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in consecutive L1 symbols, and in the m+h time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is transmitted in consecutive L2 symbols.
  • m and h are positive integers.
  • the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the second hop are different.
  • the number of the first symbol of the L1 symbols in the mth time unit is S1
  • the number of the first symbol of the L2 symbols in the m+hth time unit is S2.
  • S2 is an element in the first set, and the first set is any of the following sets:
  • the third transmission mode provided by the embodiment of the present application specifies the relationship between the end symbol number S1 of the first hop of the uplink channel and the number S2 of the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel. It is equivalent to indirectly indicating that there is a certain number of symbols between the first hop and the second hop of the uplink channel.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides three candidate values of S2, such as S1, S1+L1, and S1-L1.
  • the terminal device can be any set of these three candidate values, such as [S1+L1, S1-L1], [S1+L1, S1], [S1, S1-L1], or [S1, S1+L1, It is more flexible to select a set from S1-L1], and select an element in the selected set as the target value of S2.
  • X is related to the size of the SCS, and the embodiment of the present application determines the value of X according to the SCS corresponding to the uplink channel to be sent, which is more flexible. There may be the following three situations:
  • Case 1 when the SCS corresponding to the uplink channel is smaller than the first threshold, X is equal to P.
  • the first threshold may be determined according to the time period required for the terminal device to perform frequency tuning. If the SCS is small, the time required for frequency tuning by the low-complexity terminal equipment is short. In this case, X can be equal to P, so as to reduce the delay of sending the uplink channel as much as possible and save the resource overhead.
  • X is greater than or equal to 2 ⁇ P. If the SCS is small, the time required for frequency tuning by the low-complexity terminal equipment is relatively long. In this case, X can be equal to 2 ⁇ P, so as to leave enough time for frequency tuning for low-complexity terminal equipment as far as possible, so as to ensure the performance of sending the uplink channel as much as possible.
  • Case 3 or, when the SCS corresponding to the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the number of symbols of the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the minimum number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel, and X is equal to P .
  • X is still set equal to P, but the number of symbols in the uplink channel can be limited to ensure that the symbols discarded by the low-complexity terminal equipment due to frequency tuning account for a small proportion of the number of symbols in the PUCCH.
  • the reliability of sending the PUCCH by the low-complexity terminal equipment is guaranteed as much as possible.
  • the target transmission mode is the second transmission mode
  • X is related to L and N, and it is more flexible to determine the value of X according to L and N in this embodiment of the present application. There may be the following three situations.
  • X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ n
  • n is a positive integer.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides three candidate values of S2, such as S1, S1+L1, and S1-L1.
  • the terminal device can be any set of these three candidate values, such as [S1+L1, S1-L1], [S1+L1, S1], [S1, S1-L1], or [S1, S1+L1, It is more flexible to select a set from S1-L1], and select an element in the selected set as the target value of S2. The following three situations may be included.
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1]. That is, the sum of L and N is less than or equal to P.
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1]. That is, the sum of L1 and N is greater than P, and the sum of L and N is less than P.
  • determining the target transmission manner includes: determining the target transmission manner from multiple transmission manners, the multiple transmission manners further including non-frequency hopping transmission manner, frequency hopping transmission manner within a time unit , and one or more of the frequency hopping transmission modes between time units;
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode is: sending the uplink channel in a time unit without frequency hopping;
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode in a time unit is: sending the uplink channel in a frequency hopping manner within a time unit;
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode between time units is: repeating the transmission of the uplink channel for E times, repeating the transmission of the uplink channel for the i-th time of sending the uplink channel in the m-th time unit, and repeating it in the m+h-th time unit.
  • the i+1-th uplink channel B is transmitted in the E times of transmission of the uplink channel.
  • the information carried by the upstream channel B is a repetition of the information carried by the upstream channel A.
  • the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel A in the mth time unit is the same as the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel B in the m+hth time unit.
  • the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel A in the mth time unit is the same as the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel B in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel A are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel B, and m and h are positive integers.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide three new transmission modes for the uplink channel, which are compatible with the current transmission modes, and the terminal device can determine which transmission mode to use before sending the uplink channel.
  • determining the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes includes: determining the target transmission mode from the multiple transmission modes based on a preset rule, where the preset rule is: when the terminal device exceeds the first The uplink channel is sent within the range of the bandwidth threshold, and the target transmission mode is the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, or the third transmission mode.
  • the solution provides a way to determine the target transmission mode, for example, according to a preset rule to determine the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes, without signaling interaction and saving signaling overhead.
  • the target transmission mode determined by the terminal device may also be pre-configured by the network device or pre-defined by the protocol, or indicated by the network device through dynamic signaling, which is simple and direct, and this is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device transmits the uplink channel repeatedly R times, R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the information carried by the uplink channel sent each time in the R times of repeated transmission is the same.
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the information carried by the uplink channel sent each time in the R times of repeated transmission is the same.
  • the repeated transmission there are Q symbols between the last symbol of the second hop used for the i-th transmission of the uplink channel U and the first symbol of the first hop used for the i+1-th transmission of the uplink channel W
  • the information carried by the uplink channel W is the repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel U
  • the preset rule further includes:
  • the frequency domain resources of the first hop used for the i+1 th transmission of the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources of the second hop of the ith transmission of the uplink channel W.
  • the frequency domain resources used for the first hop of the i+1 th transmission of the uplink channel W are the same as the frequency domain resources of the second hop of the ith transmission of the uplink channel W.
  • the low-complexity terminal device when it transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, it may send the uplink channel by using the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode or the third transmission mode. Since the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode or the third transmission mode are all frequency hopping transmission modes across time slots, in two adjacent transmissions, if the Q symbols are sufficiently low-complexity, the terminal device performs frequency tuning. In this case, the low-complexity terminal equipment hops from the second hop of the i-th uplink channel to the first hop of the i+1-th uplink channel. Obviously, it is not necessary to perform frequency hopping to reduce the delay in sending the uplink channel. .
  • the starting frequency domain position of the frequency domain resource used for sending the first hop of the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the first frequency domain position
  • the starting position of the frequency domain resource used for sending the second hop of the uplink channel W in the unit is the second frequency domain resource, wherein the first frequency domain position and/or the second frequency domain position is based on the indication information from the network device.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the preconfigured starting frequency domain position of the first hop for sending the uplink channel W is the second frequency domain position, and the indication information is used to indicate that the preconfigured first hop for sending the uplink channel W is the second frequency domain position
  • the starting frequency domain position of the second hop of W is the first frequency domain position.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment and the normal terminal equipment can occupy the same time domain resources, and occupy different frequency domain resources to transmit uplink channels, thereby saving resource overhead.
  • the network equipment schedules the low-complexity terminal equipment to send the first and second hops of the uplink channel on each time slot in the frequency domain and the normal terminal equipment to send the first and second hops of the uplink channel on each time slot.
  • the second-hop delay of the uplink channel of the low-complexity terminal equipment can be sent, so the already configured terminal equipment can still be used.
  • Good common uplink channel resources do not need to separately configure uplink channel resources for low-complexity terminal equipment, thereby further saving resource overhead and signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate whether one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, and the third transmission mode are supported a transmission method.
  • the network device can indicate the transmission mode adopted by the terminal device according to the capability information reported by the terminal device, so as to ensure that the transmission mode of the uplink channel configured or indicated by the terminal device matches the actual capability of the terminal device.
  • the second aspect provides a method for receiving PUCCH, the method can be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the communication device to implement the method A device, such as a chip or a system of chips.
  • a device such as a chip or a system of chips.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate a target transmission mode among multiple transmission modes, and the multiple transmission modes include a first transmission mode, a second transmission mode, and a second transmission mode. transmission mode, and at least one of the third transmission mode.
  • the first transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used for sending the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for sending the second hop are different.
  • the number of symbols to include, n, m, and h are positive integers. It should be understood that the first hop and the second hop belong to the same uplink channel.
  • the second transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit.
  • m is a positive integer
  • h is 0 or a positive integer.
  • the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the second hop are different.
  • X is related to L and N, and/or X is related to subcarrier spacing (SCS).
  • L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel
  • N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning. It should be understood that the first hop and the second hop belong to the same uplink channel.
  • the third transmission mode is: in the mth time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in consecutive L1 symbols, and in the m+h time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is transmitted in consecutive L2 symbols.
  • m and h are positive integers.
  • the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the first hop and the frequency domain resources used for transmitting the second hop are different.
  • the number of the first symbol of the L1 symbols in the mth time unit is S1
  • the number of the first symbol of the L2 symbols in the m+hth time unit is S2.
  • S2 is an element in the first set, and the first set is any of the following sets:
  • X is greater than or equal to twice P; or, when the SCS corresponding to the upstream channel is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the The number of symbols is greater than or equal to the minimum number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel, and X is equal to the P.
  • the target transmission mode is the second transmission mode
  • X satisfies one or more of the following:
  • X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ n, and n is a positive integer; or, when L+N is greater than P ⁇ s, and L+N is less than or equal to P ⁇ (s+1) below, X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ s, and s is a positive integer; wherein, P is the number of symbols included in the time unit.
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1];
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1];
  • the method further includes:
  • Capability information from a terminal device is received, where the capability information is used to indicate whether one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, and the third transmission mode are supported.
  • the method can be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the communication device to implement the method, such as a chip system .
  • the following description will be given by taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device determines a target transmission mode, and repeats R times to send an uplink channel in the target transmission mode, the target transmission mode includes a fourth transmission mode, and the uplink channel includes at least one of the following: message 3 in the random access process Physical uplink sharing The channel Msg3 PUSCH, the physical uplink control channel PUCCH for sending the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ feedback information for the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH carrying the terminal equipment contention resolution identifier;
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the information carried by the uplink channel in each transmission in R times of repeated transmission is the same
  • the fourth transmission mode is: performing the repeated transmission of uplink times in the mth time unit
  • the i-th transmission of the uplink channel W of the channel, and the repetition of the R times to transmit the uplink channel U is performed in the m+h-th time unit.
  • the information carried by the uplink channel U is a repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel W.
  • the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the number of symbols used for transmitting the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is respectively the same as the number of symbols used for transmitting the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel U, and m and h are positive integers.
  • the embodiment of the present application specifies a low-complexity terminal device that does not support the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode for a scenario where the network device configures the terminal device to repeatedly transmit three uplink channels in the frequency hopping transmission mode within the timeslot.
  • the uplink channel can be sent 2R times repeatedly, and the frequency hopping mode is used to send between two adjacent times, and because a certain number of symbols are also spaced between two adjacent times, the transmission performance of the uplink channel caused by frequency tuning can be reduced. decline.
  • determining the target transmission mode by the terminal device includes: determining the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes, and the multiple transmission modes further include: non-frequency hopping transmission mode and intra-time unit hopping transmission mode One or more of the frequency transmission methods.
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode is: sending the uplink channel in a time unit in a non-frequency hopping mode.
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode within the time unit is: the uplink channel is sent in a frequency hopping manner within one time unit.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a new transmission mode for the uplink channel, that is, the fourth transmission mode.
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode and the intra-time unit frequency hopping transmission mode can be regarded as the existing two transmission modes of the uplink channel.
  • one transmission mode may be selected as the target transmission mode from the two existing transmission modes of the uplink channel in combination with the fourth transmission mode provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the target transmission mode is determined from multiple transmission modes, including:
  • the preset rule includes: the terminal device sends the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode; or, the preset rule includes: When the terminal device sends the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and N/L is greater than or equal to a preset threshold, the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode;
  • the N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal device for frequency tuning
  • the L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method for determining a target transmission mode.
  • the target transmission mode can be determined from a variety of transmission modes according to predetermined rules, without signaling interaction and saving signaling overhead.
  • the target transmission mode determined by the terminal device may also be pre-configured by the network device or pre-defined by the protocol, or indicated by the network device through dynamic signaling, which is simple and direct, and this is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device determines the target transmission mode, including:
  • the terminal device receives indication information from the network device, where the indication information is used to indicate the number of repetitions E, and the R and the E satisfy the following relationship:
  • the R is equal to The E; if the interval between the last symbol of the uplink channel W sent in the i-th time and the first symbol of the uplink channel U sent in the i+1-th time is less than the N, The R is equal to twice the E; wherein, the N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal device for frequency tuning.
  • the network device may configure the terminal device to send the uplink channel repeatedly E times.
  • the number of symbols in the interval between the end symbol of the i-th transmission of the uplink channel W and the i+1-th transmission of the start symbol of the uplink channel U is less than Complexity The number of symbols corresponding to the duration required for the terminal device to perform frequency tuning.
  • the low-complexity terminal device needs to discard some symbols of the uplink channel W and/or the uplink channel U.
  • the uplink channel may be sent repeatedly 2E times.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH is: the downlink control information DCI for scheduling the Msg3 PUSCH or the random access uplink grant RAR UL grant indicates the Msg3 PUSCH sent in a frequency hopping manner.
  • the fourth aspect provides another PUCCH receiving method, the method can be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device can be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the communication device to implement the method.
  • a communication device such as a chip or a system of chips. The following description will be given by taking the communication device as a network device as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the uplink channel includes at least one of the following: the Msg3 PUSCH in the random access process, and the PUCCH for sending HARQ feedback information for the PDSCH bearing the contention resolution identifier of the terminal device;
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the fourth transmission mode is: in R repeated transmissions, the information carried by the uplink channel is the same each time, and the repetition is performed R times in the mth time unit.
  • the uplink channel W is transmitted in the m+h-th time unit, and the repetition of the R-th transmission of the uplink channel is performed in the i+1-th transmission of the uplink channel U.
  • the information carried by the uplink channel U is a repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel W.
  • the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the number of symbols used for transmitting the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is respectively the same as the number of symbols used for transmitting the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel U, and m and h are positive integers.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH is: the downlink control information DCI for scheduling the Msg3 PUSCH or the random access uplink grant RAR UL grant indicates the Msg3 PUSCH sent in a frequency hopping manner.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal-side communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal-side communication device to implement functions required by the method, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module, wherein the processing module is used to determine a target transmission mode, the transceiver module is used to send an uplink channel in the target transmission mode, and the target transmission mode is a first transmission mode, a second transmission mode The second transmission method or the third transmission method.
  • the first transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit, the first hop and the second hop Hops belong to the same upstream channel.
  • X is equal to P ⁇ n
  • P is the time unit The number of symbols to include.
  • the frequency domain resources used to send the first hop are different from the frequency domain resources used to send the second hop, n is a positive integer, and m and h are positive integers;
  • the second transmission mode is: the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in the mth time unit, and the second hop of the uplink channel is sent in the m+hth time unit, and the first hop and the second hop belong to the same upstream channel.
  • the frequency domain resource used for sending the first hop is different from the frequency domain resource used for sending the second hop, m is a positive integer, and h is 0 or a positive integer.
  • X is related to L and N, and/or, X is related to the subcarrier spacing SCS;
  • L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel
  • N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning;
  • the third transmission mode is: in the mth time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in consecutive L1 symbols, and in the m+h time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is transmitted in consecutive L2 symbols. Second jump.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the first hop are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the second hop.
  • the number of the first symbol of the L1 symbols in the mth time unit is S1
  • the number of the first symbol of the L2 symbols in the m+hth time unit is S2
  • m and h are positive integers
  • S2 is an element in the first set
  • the first set is any of the following sets:
  • X is greater than or equal to 2 times of P; or, when the SCS corresponding to the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the The number of symbols of the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the minimum number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel, and X is equal to P.
  • the target transmission mode is the second transmission mode
  • X satisfies one or more of the following:
  • X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ n, and n is a positive integer; or, when L+N is greater than P ⁇ s, and L+N is less than or equal to P ⁇ (s+1) below, X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ s, and s is a positive integer; wherein, P is the number of symbols included in the time unit.
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1];
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1];
  • the processing module is specifically configured to determine the target transmission manner from multiple transmission manners, and the multiple transmission manners further include a non-frequency hopping transmission manner and a frequency hopping transmission manner within a time unit , and one or more of the frequency hopping transmission modes between time units;
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode is: sending the uplink channel in a time unit without frequency hopping;
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode in a time unit is: sending the uplink channel in a frequency hopping manner within a time unit;
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode between time units is: repeating the transmission of the uplink channel for E times, and performing the i-th transmission of the uplink channel A of the repeating E times of sending the uplink channel in the m-th time unit, and sending the uplink channel A in the m+h-th time unit.
  • the i+1 th time of sending the uplink channel by repeating the R times is to send the uplink channel B, and the information carried by the uplink channel B is the repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel A, and is used to send the uplink channel A in the mth time unit.
  • the starting symbol and the number of symbols are the same as the starting symbols and the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel B in the m+h th time unit, the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel A and the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel B
  • the frequency domain resources of are different, and the m and h are positive integers.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine the target transmission mode from the multiple transmission modes based on a preset rule, where the preset rule is: when the terminal device exceeds the first The uplink channel is sent within the range of the bandwidth threshold, and the target transmission mode is the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, or the third transmission mode.
  • the starting frequency domain position of the frequency domain resource used for sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit is the first frequency domain position
  • the starting frequency domain position of the frequency domain resource used for sending the second hop of the uplink channel is the second frequency domain resource, wherein the first frequency domain position and/or the second frequency domain position is determined according to the indication information from the network device , the indication information is used to indicate that the starting frequency domain position of the preconfigured frequency domain resource for sending the first hop of the uplink channel is the second frequency domain position, and is used to indicate the preconfigured use
  • the starting frequency domain position of the frequency domain resource for transmitting the second hop of the uplink channel is the first frequency domain position.
  • the terminal device transmits the uplink channel repeatedly R times, R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the information carried by the uplink channel sent each time in the R times of repeated transmission is the same.
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2
  • the information carried by the uplink channel sent each time in the R times of repeated transmission is the same.
  • the repeated transmission there are Q symbols between the last symbol of the second hop used for the i-th transmission of the uplink channel U and the first symbol of the first hop used for the i+1-th transmission of the uplink channel W,
  • the information carried by the uplink channel W is the repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel U;
  • the frequency domain resources of the first hop used for the i+1 th transmission of the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources of the second hop of the ith transmission of the uplink channel U.
  • the frequency domain resources used for the first hop of the i+1 th transmission of the uplink channel W are the same as the frequency domain resources of the second hop of the ith transmission of the uplink channel U.
  • the transceiver module is further used for:
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network-side communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the network-side communication device to implement functions required by the method, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication apparatus may include a processing module and a transceiving module, wherein the processing module is configured to generate first indication information; the transceiving module is adapted to send the first indication information to a terminal device, where the first indication information is used for Indicates a target transmission mode among multiple transmission modes, and the multiple transmission modes include at least one of a first transmission mode, a second transmission mode, and a third transmission mode.
  • the first transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time unit, sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time unit, the first hop and the second hop
  • the hops belong to the same uplink channel, where the last symbol of the symbols used to send the first hop and the first symbol of the symbols used to send the second hop are separated by X symbols, where X is equal to P ⁇ n , P is the number of symbols included in the time unit, the frequency domain resource used for sending the first hop is different from the frequency domain resource used for sending the second hop, n is a positive integer, and m and h are positive integers;
  • the second transmission mode is: the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in the mth time unit, and the second hop of the uplink channel is sent in the m+hth time unit, and the first hop and the second hop belong to On the same uplink channel, there is an interval of X symbols between the last symbol of the symbols used for transmitting the first hop and the first symbol of the symbols used to transmit the second hop.
  • the frequency domain resource used for sending the first hop is different from the frequency domain resource used for sending the second hop, m is a positive integer, and h is 0 or a positive integer.
  • X is related to L and N, and/or, X is related to the subcarrier spacing SCS; L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel, and N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning;
  • the third transmission mode is: in the mth time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in consecutive L1 symbols, and in the m+h time unit, the first hop of the uplink channel is transmitted in consecutive L2 symbols. Second jump.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the first hop are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the second hop.
  • the number of the first symbol of the L1 symbols in the mth time unit is S1
  • the number of the first symbol of the L2 symbols in the m+hth time unit is S2
  • m and h are positive integers
  • S2 is an element in the first set
  • the first set is any of the following sets:
  • X is greater than or equal to 2 times of P; or, when the SCS corresponding to the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the The number of symbols of the uplink channel is greater than or equal to the minimum number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel, and X is equal to P.
  • the target transmission mode is the second transmission mode
  • X satisfies one or more of the following:
  • X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ n, and n is a positive integer; or, when L+N is greater than P ⁇ s, and L+N is less than or equal to P ⁇ (s+1) below, X is greater than or equal to P ⁇ s, and s is a positive integer; wherein, P is the number of symbols included in the time unit.
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1];
  • S2 is an element in [S1, S1+L1];
  • the transceiver module is further used for:
  • Capability information from the terminal device is received, where the capability information is used to indicate whether one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, and the third transmission mode are supported.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal-side communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal-side communication device to implement functions required by the method, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module is configured to determine a target transmission mode; the transceiver module is configured to repeat R times to send an uplink channel in the target transmission mode, the target transmission mode includes a fourth transmission mode, and the uplink channel includes at least one of the following : Msg3 PUSCH in the random access process, the PUCCH used to send HARQ feedback information for the PDSCH carrying the terminal equipment contention resolution identifier.
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the information carried by the uplink channel is the same every time in R repeated transmissions.
  • the fourth transmission mode is: repeating the i-th transmission of the uplink channel W in the m-th time unit, and repeating the i+1-th transmission of the uplink channel in the m+h-th time unit.
  • the uplink channel U is sent again.
  • the information carried by the uplink channel U is a repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel W.
  • the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel U, and m and h are positive integers.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine the target transmission manner from multiple transmission manners, the multiple transmission manners further include: non-frequency hopping transmission manner and frequency hopping transmission within a time unit one or more of the ways.
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode is: sending the uplink channel in a time unit without frequency hopping.
  • the transmission mode of frequency hopping within a time unit is as follows: the uplink channel is sent in a frequency hopping manner within a time unit.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes based on a preset rule.
  • the preset rule includes: sending the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode.
  • the preset rule includes: when the uplink channel is sent within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and the N/L is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode.
  • N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning
  • L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine R according to the received indication information of the network device, where the indication information is used to indicate the number of repetitions E, and R and E satisfy the following relationship:
  • R is equal to E. If the interval between the last symbol of the upstream channel W sent in the i-th time and the first symbol of the uplink channel U sent in the i+1-th time is greater than or equal to N, R is equal to E. If the interval between the last symbol of the upstream channel W sent at the i-th time and the first symbol of the upstream channel U sent at the i+1-th time is less than N, R is equal to twice E. Wherein, N is the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH is: the Msg3 PUSCH that is used to schedule the Msg3 PUSCH or the random access uplink grant RAR UL grant indicates the Msg3 PUSCH sent in a frequency hopping manner.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network-side communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the network-side communication device to implement functions required by the method, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. Wherein, the processing module generates first indication information; the transceiver module is configured to send third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used for the terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel R times in the target transmission mode.
  • the target transmission mode includes a fourth transmission mode
  • the uplink channel includes at least one of the following: Msg3 PUSCH in the random access process, and PUCCH for sending HARQ feedback information for PDSCH bearing the contention resolution identifier of the terminal device.
  • R is a positive integer greater than or equal to 2, and the information carried by the uplink channel is the same every time in R repeated transmissions.
  • the fourth transmission mode is: repeating the i-th transmission of the uplink channel W in the m-th time unit, and repeating the i+1-th transmission of the uplink channel in the m+h-th time unit.
  • the uplink channel U is sent again.
  • the information carried by the uplink channel U is a repetition of the information carried by the uplink channel W.
  • the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of the start symbol used for sending the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel W in the mth time unit is the same as the number of symbols used to transmit the uplink channel U in the m+hth time unit.
  • the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel W are different from the frequency domain resources used to transmit the uplink channel U, and m and h are positive integers.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine the target transmission manner from multiple transmission manners, the multiple transmission manners further include: non-frequency hopping transmission manner and frequency hopping transmission within a time unit one or more of the ways.
  • the non-frequency hopping transmission mode is: sending the uplink channel in a time unit without frequency hopping.
  • the transmission mode of frequency hopping within a time unit is as follows: the uplink channel is sent in a frequency hopping manner within a time unit.
  • the processing module is specifically configured to: determine the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes based on a preset rule.
  • the preset rule includes: sending the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode.
  • the preset rule includes: when the uplink channel is sent within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and the N/L is greater than or equal to the preset threshold, the target transmission mode is the fourth transmission mode.
  • N is the maximum number of symbols that can be used for frequency tuning when the terminal device performs frequency hopping within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold
  • L is the number of symbols of the uplink channel.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to: send fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the number of repetitions E, where R and E satisfy the following relationship:
  • R is equal to E. If the interval between the last symbol of the uplink channel W sent in the i-th time and the first symbol of the uplink channel U sent in the i+1-th time is greater than or equal to N, R is equal to E. If the interval between the last symbol of the uplink channel W sent in the i-th time and the first symbol of the uplink channel U sent in the i+1-th time is less than N, R is equal to 2 times of E. Among them, N is the maximum number of symbols that the terminal equipment can use for frequency tuning.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH is: the Msg3 PUSCH that is used to schedule the Msg3 PUSCH or the random access uplink grant RAR UL grant indicates the Msg3 PUSCH sent in a frequency hopping manner.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, and the communication device may be the communication device of any one of the fifth to eighth aspects in the foregoing embodiments, or the communication device provided in the fifth to eighth aspects A chip or system of chips in a communication device of any aspect.
  • the communication device includes a communication interface, a processor, and optionally, a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs or instructions or data
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and the communication interface, and when the processor reads the computer program or instructions or data, the communication apparatus is made to execute the terminal device in the above method embodiment. or the method performed by the network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in a communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, a codec, etc. in the communication device, or, if the communication device is a chip provided in a network device, the communication interface It can be an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output circuits, pins, etc., for inputting/outputting instructions, data or signals.
  • the transceiver is used for the communication device to communicate with other devices. Exemplarily, when the communication device is a terminal, the other device is a network device; or, when the communication device is a network device, the other device is a terminal.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory and/or a communication interface, for implementing any one of the first to fourth aspects. method.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes the communication device described in the fifth aspect and the communication device described in the sixth aspect; or the communication system includes the communication device described in the seventh aspect The communication device and the communication device in the eighth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, any one of the above-mentioned first to fourth aspects is implemented Methods.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising: computer program code that, when executed, causes the method of any one of the first to fourth aspects above be executed.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable;
  • Fig. 2 is a kind of schematic diagram of frequency hopping signal
  • Fig. 3 is a kind of schematic diagram of non-frequency hopping signal
  • Fig. 4 is a kind of schematic diagram of inter-slot frequency hopping
  • Fig. 5 is a kind of schematic diagram of intra-slot frequency hopping
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a normal terminal equipment repeatedly sending PUCCH in a transmission mode of frequency hopping in a time slot;
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of the normal terminal equipment repeatedly sending PUCCH in the transmission mode of frequency hopping in the time slot;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a normal terminal equipment repeatedly sending PUCCH in a frequency hopping transmission mode between time slots;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device sending PUCCH within a frequency range that does not exceed the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device sending PUCCH in a frequency range exceeding the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device;
  • FIG. 11 is a first schematic diagram of a time-frequency resource used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 12 is a second schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 13 is a third schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 14 is a fourth schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 15 is a fifth schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 16 is a sixth schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 17 is a seventh schematic diagram of a time-frequency resource used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 18 is an eighth schematic diagram of time-frequency resources used by a low-complexity terminal device to send PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 19 is a ninth schematic diagram of a time-frequency resource used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH in an embodiment of the present application;
  • 20 is a schematic flowchart of a method for sending and receiving an uplink channel provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • 21 is a schematic diagram of a low-complexity terminal device 1 sending PUCCH on the configured PUCCH resource;
  • 22 is a schematic diagram of two low-complexity terminal devices sending PUCCH on configured PUCCH resources
  • 23 is another schematic diagram of two low-complexity terminal devices sending PUCCH on configured PUCCH resources
  • 24 is a schematic diagram of three low-complexity terminal devices sharing PUCCH resources in the prior art
  • 25 is a schematic diagram of sharing PUCCH resources by three low-complexity terminal devices according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 27 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 28 is another schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 29 is another schematic structural diagram of another communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to the fifth generation (the fifth generation, 5G) mobile communication system, such as the NR system, or to the long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, or can also be applied to The next-generation mobile communication system or other similar communication systems are not specifically limited.
  • FIG. 1 is an exemplary architecture diagram of a communication system to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable, and the communication system may include a core network device, a network device, and at least one terminal.
  • the terminal is connected with the network device in a wireless way, and the network device is connected with the core network device in a wireless or wired way.
  • the core network device and the network device can be independent and different physical devices; or the functions of the core network device and the logical function of the network device are integrated on the same physical device; or the functions of part of the core network device and the functions of part of the network device integrated on the same physical device. It should be noted that FIG.
  • the communication system may also include other network devices, such as wireless relay devices, wireless backhaul devices, and the like.
  • a network device is an access device that a terminal wirelessly accesses into the mobile communication system, and includes, for example, an access network (access network, AN) device, such as a base station (eg, an access point).
  • a network device may also refer to a device that communicates with a terminal over an air interface, such as other possible terminal devices; another example, a network device in a V2X technology is a road side unit (RSU).
  • the base station may be used to convert received air frames to and from internet protocol (IP) packets and act as a router between the terminal and the rest of the access network, which may include the IP network.
  • IP internet protocol
  • the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity supporting V2X applications and can exchange messages with other entities supporting V2X applications.
  • the network device can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system or long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A); Or it can also include the next generation node B (gNB) in the 5G NR system; or it can also include the centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) in the cloud radio access network (Cloud RAN) system ) and distributed unit (distributed unit, DU); or may also include access nodes in a wireless fidelity (wIreless-fIdelity, Wi-Fi) system, etc., the specific technology used by the embodiments of this application for wireless network equipment There is no limitation on the specific device form.
  • NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B in a long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system or long term evolution-advanced (LTE-
  • a terminal may be a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a wireless Communication equipment, user agent or user equipment.
  • the terminal device in this embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with a wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal, an augmented reality (AR) terminal, an industrial Wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, etc.
  • the network equipment may be a next generation base station (next Generation node B, gNB) in an NR system, an evolved base station (evolutional node B, eNB) in an LTE system, or the like.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as on-board terminal equipment.
  • the on-board terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • Terminals can be classified into multiple types of terminals according to the types of services supported by the terminal equipment.
  • NR REDCAP UE is a low-complexity or low-capability (REDuced CAPability, REDCAP) terminal.
  • This type of terminal may be less complex than other terminals in terms of supported bandwidth, power consumption, and number of antennas, such as the supported bandwidth. Narrower, lower power consumption, fewer antennas, etc.
  • This type of terminal may also be called (NR light, NRL) terminal, that is, a lightweight version of the terminal.
  • a terminal device that is not of low complexity or reduced capability may be referred to as a normal terminal device or a legacy terminal device in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a terminal device that is not of low complexity or reduced capability
  • a normal terminal device for example, an eMBB terminal device
  • a legacy terminal device in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first type of terminal equipment that is, low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the second type of terminal equipment may be terminal equipment other than low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be the first type of terminal device or the second type of terminal device, or other terminal device that needs to perform transmission performance enhancement, such as NR enhanced mobile broadband (Enhanced Mobile Broadband, eMBB) terminal device and the like.
  • NR enhanced mobile broadband Enhanced Mobile Broadband, eMBB
  • the difference between the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment includes at least one of the following:
  • the maximum bandwidth supported by the first type of terminal equipment may be greater than the maximum bandwidth supported by the second type of terminal equipment.
  • the first type of terminal equipment can support the simultaneous use of 100MHz frequency domain resources on one carrier to communicate with network equipment, while the second type of terminal equipment can support the maximum use of 20MHz or 10MHz or 5MHz frequency domain resources and network devices to communicate.
  • the number of transceiver antennas is different.
  • the antenna configuration of the terminal device of the first type may be larger than the antenna configuration of the terminal device of the second type.
  • the minimum antenna configuration supported by the first type of terminal device may be greater than the maximum antenna configuration supported by the second type of terminal device.
  • Uplink maximum transmit power is different.
  • the maximum uplink transmit power of the first type of terminal equipment may be greater than the uplink maximum transmit power of the second type of terminal equipment.
  • the protocol versions corresponding to the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment are different.
  • NR Rel-15 and NR Rel-16 terminal equipment can be considered as the first type of terminal equipment
  • the second type of terminal equipment can be considered as NR Rel-17 terminal equipment.
  • the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment support different carrier aggregation (CA) capabilities.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the first type of terminal equipment may support carrier aggregation, but the second type of terminal equipment does not support carrier aggregation; for another example, both the second type of terminal equipment and the first type of terminal equipment support carrier aggregation, but the first type of terminal equipment supports both.
  • the maximum number of cells for carrier aggregation is greater than the maximum number of cells for carrier aggregation supported by the second type of terminal equipment at the same time.
  • the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment have different frequency division duplex (FDD) capabilities.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • a first type of terminal device may support full-duplex FDD, while a second type of terminal device may only support half-duplex FDD.
  • the second type of terminal equipment and the first type of terminal equipment have different data processing time capabilities. For example, the minimum delay between the first type of terminal equipment receiving downlink data and sending the feedback on the downlink data is smaller than that of the second type of terminal equipment. The minimum delay between a device receiving downlink data and sending feedback on that downlink data.
  • the uplink and/or downlink corresponding to the first type of terminal equipment and the second type of terminal equipment have different transmission peak rates.
  • Time unit which may refer to a time slot (slot) or subframe or a time unit including a certain number of symbols, or may also be a time span.
  • the time unit is a time slot as an example.
  • a part of a time slot can refer to a symbol used for uplink transmission within a time slot, for example, a symbol starting from one uplink and downlink transition point to the slot boundary, or from one uplink and downlink transition point to the next The symbol used for uplink transmission at the uplink and downlink transition point.
  • a part of a time slot may be a symbol for downlink transmission starting from a time slot boundary to an uplink/downlink transition point, or a symbol for downlink transmission from an uplink/downlink transition point to a time slot boundary , or the symbol used for downlink transmission from one uplink/downlink transition point to the next uplink/downlink transition point.
  • symbols refer to time-domain symbols, where time-domain symbols may be orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, or discrete Fourier transform spread spectrum OFDM (Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM, DFT-s-OFDM) symbol.
  • the carrier bandwidth part can be a continuous resource in the frequency domain.
  • the carrier bandwidth part can also be called the bandwidth part (BWP or BP), subband, subband bandwidth, narrowband or narrowband (narrowband) bandwidth, or may have other names, the embodiment of this application does not limit the name of the carrier bandwidth part, and in this document, for simplicity, the name is BWP as an example.
  • the carrier bandwidth part described in this paper can be the downlink carrier bandwidth part, which is used for the terminal equipment to perform downlink reception. At this time, the bandwidth of the carrier bandwidth part can exceed the receiving bandwidth capability of the terminal equipment; or, the carrier bandwidth part can also be the uplink carrier bandwidth part. The part is used for the terminal equipment to perform uplink transmission. At this time, the bandwidth of the carrier bandwidth part can exceed the transmission bandwidth capability of the terminal equipment.
  • the bandwidth capability of the terminal device may be the channel bandwidth supported by the terminal device, or the maximum channel bandwidth supported by the terminal device, or the maximum transmission bandwidth supported by the terminal device, or the resource block ( resource block, RB), or the maximum number of resource blocks supported by the terminal device.
  • a network device can configure a BWP for a terminal device, and the terminal device transmits information on the configured BWP.
  • Information transmission herein may be channel transmission, signaling transmission, data transmission or reference signal transmission.
  • the transmission here can be either sending or receiving.
  • Frequency hopping refers to a communication method in which both the receiving end and the transmitting end transform the frequency domain resources used in the information transmission process according to predetermined rules, so as to obtain frequency diversity gain.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of a frequency hopping signal. As shown in Figure 2, it includes 5 time periods in the time domain: t1 to t5, and includes 3 frequency domain resources in the frequency domain: f1 to f3, and the corresponding frequency domain resources of the 5 time periods from t1 to t5 are f3 respectively. , f1, f2, f3, and f1.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a non-frequency hopping signal.
  • FIG. 3 it includes 5 time periods in the time domain: t1 to t5, and includes 3 frequency domain resources in the frequency domain: f1 to f3, and the corresponding frequency domain resources of the 5 time periods from t1 to t5 are f2.
  • radio resource control (RRC) signaling indicates whether intra-slot frequency hopping or inter-slot frequency hopping is used, and then scheduling signaling (such as DCI) indicates whether hopping will be used in data transmission. frequency.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • scheduling signaling such as DCI
  • the scheduling signaling also indicates the time-frequency resources for data transmission.
  • the information transmission in this document may be channel transmission, signaling transmission, data transmission or reference signal transmission. The transmission here can be either sending or receiving.
  • the uplink information in this document may be information carried by an uplink channel, such as PUCCH or PUSCH.
  • Intra-slot frequency hopping means that frequency domain resources used for information transmission are changed within a slot according to predetermined rules.
  • the information to be transmitted is divided into two parts, and the two parts are transmitted using different frequency domain resources in the slot.
  • the sending end of the PUCCH assuming that the length of the PUCCH is L, that is, the PUCCH occupies L symbols, and the sending end sends the PUCCH by frequency hopping in the time slot, and the PUCCH can be divided into the first hop and the second hop, where, Take the first of L symbols symbols are sent in the first hop on the first frequency domain resource, and among the L symbols symbols are sent for the second hop on the second frequency domain resource.
  • the first frequency domain resource and the second frequency domain resource may or may not have an intersection.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of intra-slot frequency hopping.
  • one slot is included in the time domain, and two frequency domain resources are included in the frequency domain: f1 and f2.
  • the PUCCH sent by the sender includes two parts, namely the first part and the second part. Taking the PUCCH occupying 8 symbols as an example, the transmitting end uses the frequency domain resource f2 to send the first part on symbols 6 to 9, and the second part uses the frequency domain resource f1 to send the second part on symbols 10 to 13.
  • the shaded parts in FIG. 4 represent the resources occupied by the transmission of the PUCCH.
  • one slot may include 14 symbols; when the OFDM symbol adopts an extended cyclic prefix (extended cyclic prefix, ECP), one slot 12 symbols can be included. In the embodiment of the present application, one slot includes 14 symbols as an example.
  • Inter-slot frequency hopping means that the frequency domain resources used for information transmission remain unchanged within the slot, but the frequency domain resources used for information transmission change between different slots according to predetermined rules.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of inter-slot frequency hopping. As shown in FIG. 5 , two slots are included in the time domain, each slot has 14 symbols, and two frequency domain resources are included in the frequency domain: f1 and f2. The sender uses the frequency domain resource f1 to send data in the first slot, and uses the frequency domain resource f2 to send data in the second slot. It should be noted that the embodiment of the present application also provides a new uplink channel transmission mode, and the transmission mode may also transmit the uplink channel in a frequency hopping manner in multiple time slots. For distinction, the method of "transmitting an uplink channel in a frequency hopping manner in multiple time slots" provided in the embodiments of the present application is collectively referred to as a cross-slot frequency hopping transmission manner.
  • the terminal device can repeatedly transmit the uplink channel in multiple time slots, and the specific number of repeated transmissions N repeat can be configured by the network device.
  • a network device may configure N repeat equal to 1, 2, 4, or 8, etc.
  • the network device can also configure whether the uplink channel is sent in frequency hopping mode, and also configure the uplink channel to send in the transmission mode of intra-slot frequency hopping or the transmission mode of frequency hopping between time slots.
  • the uplink channel is the PUSCH.
  • the network device configures the PUSCH to be repeatedly sent in multiple time slots, and configures to send the PUSCH in a frequency hopping transmission mode within the time slot.
  • the network device can also instruct the terminal device whether to send the PUSCH according to the configured frequency hopping transmission mode through downlink signaling.
  • the network device can send DCI to the terminal device, and can use 1 bit in the DCI to instruct the terminal device to repeatedly send the PUSCH N repeat times according to the configured frequency hopping transmission mode, or repeatedly send N repeat times in the non-frequency hopping transmission mode PUSCH.
  • sending an uplink channel once may also be referred to as sending an uplink channel.
  • the uplink channel is PUCCH
  • the network device will configure resources for sending PUCCH for normal terminal devices, and configure or indicate some parameters.
  • the normal terminal device sends the PUCCH on the resources configured by the network device according to these parameters.
  • the network device may configure a first PUCCH resource (also referred to as a first PUCCH format) for a normal terminal device, which may be one of PUCCH format 0 to PUCCH format 4.
  • the network device also configures or instructs the parameters shown in Table 1 to assist the normal terminal device to send the PUCCH.
  • the normal terminal equipment sends the PUCCH on the first PUCCH resource according to the parameters shown in the table. It can be seen from Table 1 that if the network device instructs the normal terminal device to send the PUCCH in a frequency hopping manner, the network device also instructs the start symbol of the first hop of the PUCCH. As shown in Table 1, for intra-slot frequency hopping, a normal terminal device can determine the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH according to the length of the PUCCH and the start symbol of the first hop of the PUCCH.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a normal terminal device repeatedly sending a PUCCH in a transmission manner of frequency hopping within a time slot.
  • Figure 6 takes N repeat equal to 2 as an example.
  • the number of the start symbol of the first hop of the PUCCH configured by the network device is S1.
  • the length of the PUCCH is L
  • the length L1 of the first hop of the PUCCH is equal to
  • the length L2 of the second hop of PUCCH is The number S2 of the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH is
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic diagram of the normal terminal equipment repeatedly sending the PUCCH in the transmission mode of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • FIG. 7 takes the example of repeated transmission times N repeat being equal to 4 and the length of the PUCCH being L. Since the PUCCH is sent in the transmission mode of frequency hopping within the time slot, in each time slot, the first hop of the PUCCH is sent with the first L1 symbols among the L symbols, and the PUCCH is sent with the L2 symbols among the L symbols. the second jump.
  • L1 in Figure 7 is the L2 is The number of the first symbol (also referred to as the start symbol in this paper) occupied by the first hop of the PUCCH in each time slot is the same, and the number of the start symbol occupied by the second hop of the PUCCH in each time slot is also the same .
  • the numbers of the start symbols occupied by the first hop of the PUCCH in each time slot are all S1, and the numbers of the start symbols occupied by the second hop of the PUCCH are both S2.
  • the symbol numbers are renumbered at the beginning of each time slot, and the first symbol number in each time slot is 0.
  • FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 take as an example that a normal terminal equipment repeatedly transmits the PUCCH in the transmission mode of frequency hopping within a time slot.
  • the network device may configure the normal terminal device to repeatedly transmit the PUCCH in an inter-slot frequency hopping transmission manner.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a normal terminal device repeatedly sending PUCCH in a frequency hopping transmission mode between time slots.
  • FIG. 8 takes the example that the number of repeated transmissions N repeat is equal to 4 and the length of the PUCCH is L. Since the PUCCH is sent in the transmission mode of frequency hopping between time slots, the PUCCH is sent with L symbols in each time slot, and the frequency domain resources occupied by the two adjacent sending of the PUCCH are different. The numbers of the start symbols occupied by the PUCCH in each time slot are the same. As shown in FIG. 8 , the number of the start symbol occupied by the PUCCH in each time slot is S1.
  • FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 all take the first hop of the PUCCH being sent in the mth time slot as an example.
  • the determination of the time slot m is related to at least one of the following: the time slot d where the DCI sent by the network device is located, the time slot n of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH scheduled by the DCI sent by the network device, and the HARQ feedback time slot offset indicated by the DCI k related.
  • the time slot of the DCI scheduling PDSCH sent by the network device is n
  • the HARQ feedback time slot offset indicated by the DCI is k
  • m n+k.
  • the terminal device transmits the PUCCH from the mth time slot as an example in the following. unless otherwise specified. It should be understood that the time slot number corresponding to the mth time slot may not be m. For example, if the time slot numbers are renumbered at the beginning of each radio frame, and the first time slot number at the beginning of each radio frame is 0, then the mth time slot in the current radio frame corresponds to The time slot is numbered m-1.
  • the terminal device can use any one of the above three transmission modes to send the uplink channel. That is, the terminal device can send the uplink channel by any one of the non-frequency hopping transmission mode, the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode, and the inter-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • a terminal device performs downlink channel reception or uplink channel transmission within a frequency range that does not exceed the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device. In this case, the terminal equipment does not need frequency tuning, as shown in Figure 9.
  • the frequency domain resources occupied by downlink channel reception or uplink channel transmission in FIG. 9 are shaded parts in FIG. 9 .
  • the terminal device may be required to perform downlink channel reception or uplink channel transmission in a larger frequency range.
  • a network device configures a common PUCCH resource or a dedicated PUCCH resource for the terminal device for the terminal device to send PUCCH.
  • the terminal device may determine to send a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ, HARQ) for, for example, Msg4 from one common PUCCH resource set among the predefined or configured multiple common PUCCH resource sets ) feedback (acknowledge, ACK) (HARQ-ACK) information.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • low-complexity terminal equipment because the bandwidth capability of low-complexity terminal equipment is limited, if the frequency domain span of the configured or predefined common PUCCH resources exceeds the maximum channel bandwidth supported by low-complexity terminal equipment, low-complexity terminal equipment In order to use the common PUCCH resource, the device needs to transmit the PUCCH in a frequency range exceeding the maximum channel bandwidth of the terminal device. This requires low-complexity terminal equipment to perform frequency tuning to receive or transmit information in a wider frequency range. As shown in FIG. 10 , when the low-complexity terminal device transmits the uplink channel in the frequency range exceeding the maximum channel bandwidth of the low-complexity terminal device, the low-complexity terminal device needs M symbols to perform frequency tuning.
  • frequency tuning can also be considered as frequency switching, or center frequency switching.
  • the Msg4 can be understood as the contention resolution identifier of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device needs to send HARQ feedback information through the PUCCH.
  • the Msg4 can also be understood as a message carried by the PDSCH.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment performs frequency tuning at the time of M symbols. It can also be understood that the M symbols are destroyed and cannot transmit the uplink channel, but the normal terminal equipment can send the uplink channel in these M symbols, which cannot be Avoid the interference of low-complexity terminal equipment to normal terminal equipment. For example, there are originally N symbols used to transmit the uplink channel of low-complexity terminal equipment or normal terminal equipment. For low-complexity terminal equipment, M symbols among N symbols are used for frequency tuning, that is, M symbols are eliminated, then the length of the orthogonal sequence used by the low-complexity terminal equipment to send the uplink channel changes from N to N-M.
  • the length of the orthogonal sequence used for sending the uplink channel is still N, which obviously cannot guarantee the orthogonality of the uplink channel sent by the low-complex terminal equipment and the normal terminal equipment, causing interference to the normal terminal equipment sending the uplink channel.
  • the performance of normal terminal equipment in sending uplink channels is degraded.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide four new transmission modes for uplink channels, even if the low-complexity terminal device performs downlink channel reception or uplink channel transmission in a frequency range exceeding the maximum channel bandwidth of the low-complexity terminal device, It can also reduce the performance degradation of the low-complexity terminal equipment sending the uplink channel.
  • the interference of the low-complexity terminal equipment on the downlink channel reception or the uplink channel transmission of the normal terminal equipment can be reduced, and the degradation of the channel transmission performance of the normal terminal equipment can be avoided as much as possible.
  • the transmission mode of any new uplink channel provided by the embodiments of the present application is to transmit the uplink channel in one or more time units in a frequency hopping manner.
  • the four new transmission manners of the uplink channel provided by the embodiments of the present application may be referred to as frequency hopping transmission manners across time units.
  • the frequency hopping transmission mode across time units is also referred to as a cross-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the following takes the time unit as a time slot as an example, and the four new uplink channel transmission modes provided by the embodiments of the present application are referred to as the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, and the fourth transmission mode .
  • the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, and the fourth transmission mode provided by the embodiments of the present application are respectively introduced below.
  • the uplink channel is PUCCH, unless it is indicated that the uplink channel is PUSCH.
  • the number of symbols of PUCCH is L
  • the number of symbols of the first hop of PUCCH is L1
  • Use N to indicate that the terminal equipment performs frequency tuning within N symbols, unless otherwise specified.
  • N may also represent the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols that can be used for frequency tuning when the uplink channel is transmitted within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the N may be pre-configured by the network device, and/or pre-defined by the protocol, and/or determined according to the capability information/assistance information reported by the terminal device. "The number of symbols that can be used or the maximum number of symbols" can be the number of symbols indicated by the network device. For example, the pre-configured number of symbols used for frequency tuning is 5, then the "maximum number of symbols that can be used” is 5 . It should be understood that the number of symbols used for frequency tuning actually required by the terminal device may be less than N, or exactly N, or may not be an integer number of symbols.
  • the number of symbols actually required by the terminal equipment for frequency tuning may also be greater than N.
  • the network device indicates that the number of symbols used for frequency tuning is 14, but the actual number of symbols required by the terminal device for frequency tuning is 16.
  • the first bandwidth threshold may be the maximum transmission bandwidth supported by the terminal device. In some cases, the first bandwidth threshold may also be smaller than the maximum transmission bandwidth supported by the terminal device, as long as the terminal device needs to perform frequency tuning when sending the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the first transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel in the mth time slot, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel in the m+hth time slot.
  • there is an interval of X symbols between the last symbol in the symbols of the first hop used for transmitting the uplink channel and the first symbol in the symbols of the second hop used for transmitting the uplink channel, X 14 ⁇ n, n is a positive integer.
  • X is an integer multiple of 14. Both m and h are positive integers.
  • the first hop of the uplink channel and the second hop of the uplink channel belong to the same uplink channel, that is, one uplink channel is sent in the mth time slot and the m+hth time slot. It should be noted that in this article "X symbols are separated between the last symbol in the symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the first symbol of the symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel", the X symbols do not include The last symbol of the symbols of the first hop of the upstream channel, and the first symbol of the symbols of the second hop of the upstream channel.
  • X can be predefined, or the network device configures X, or X is Indicated by network equipment through dynamic signaling. For example, the network device indicates that X is 14 or 28 through the DCI. If it is specified that the interval between sending the end symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel is 14 ⁇ n symbols, then n can be predefined, or the network device configures n, or the network device passes the dynamic Signaling indicates n. For example, if the network device indicates through DCI that n is 1, then X is 14; if the network device indicates through DCI that n is 2, then X is 28, and so on.
  • the first transmission mode stipulates that there is a certain number of symbols between the first hop and the second hop of the uplink channel, for a low-complexity terminal device, even if the frequency exceeds the maximum channel bandwidth of the low-complexity terminal device
  • Uplink channel reception or uplink channel transmission can be performed within the range, and frequency tuning can also be performed within a certain number of symbols, thereby reducing the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance of low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the network device configures the public PUCCH resource
  • the start symbol and the symbol length of the PUCCH resource in the time slot are determined, and the candidate frequency domain position corresponding to the PUCCH resource is also determined.
  • the common PUCCH resource is shared by all terminal devices, that is, the normal terminal device and the low-complexity terminal device share the common PUCCH resource.
  • the PUCCH may be sent according to the frequency domain resource location indicated by the network device.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment transmits the PUCCH in the frequency range exceeding the maximum channel bandwidth of the low-complexity terminal equipment
  • the PUCCH is sent in the first transmission. That is, one PUCCH is sent in a frequency hopping manner in multiple time slots, and X symbols are separated between the first hop of the PUCCH and the second hop of the PUCCH.
  • frequency tuning can be performed within these X symbols without affecting the PUCCH transmission and/or reception, thereby reducing the degradation of the PUCCH transmission performance of the low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment can determine the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH and the start of the second hop when the normal terminal equipment adopts the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode to send the PUCCH
  • the symbols are numbered the same.
  • network devices can uniformly configure common PUCCH resources (formats) through system messages, and there is no need to configure separate PUCCH formats for low-complexity terminal devices, which can reduce signaling overhead and resource overhead. For example, using the current PUCCH format to configure PUCCH resources for terminal equipment, the position of candidate PUCCH symbols in each time slot remains unchanged, which can reduce the resources used for sending PUCCH, and will not occupy resources allocated for other terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a time-frequency resource used by a low-complexity terminal device to send a PUCCH according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device configures the terminal device in which frequency hopping mode the PUCCH is sent, and configures the number of the start symbol of the first hop of the PUCCH, for example, S1.
  • the normal terminal device will send the PUCCH in the frequency hopping transmission mode within the time slot. It is assumed that the network device configures the terminal device to transmit the PUCCH in the frequency hopping transmission mode in the time slot, and the length of the PUCCH is L symbols. It can be known that the length of the first hop of the PUCCH is L1, the length of the second hop of the PUCCH is L2, and the number S2 of the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH is S1+L1.
  • the PUCCH will be sent in a frequency hopping manner in the time slot m, that is, the first hop of the PUCCH is sent with L1 symbols starting from the start symbol S1 in the time slot m, and the first hop starting from the start symbol S2 is L2 symbols transmit the second hop of the PUCCH.
  • the low-complexity terminal device may determine to use the first transmission mode to send the PUCCH, that is, to send one PUCCH in two time slots. As shown in FIG.
  • the first hop of the PUCCH is sent for L1 consecutive symbols from the start symbol S1 in the mth time slot, and the PUCCH is sent for L2 consecutive symbols from the start symbol S2 in the m+1th time slot.
  • Table 2 shows the PUCCH resource configuration and the parameters for sending PUCCH by normal terminal equipment and low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the network device can uniformly configure common PUCCH resources for the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device through the PUCCH format.
  • the low-complexity terminal device sends the PUCCH in the first transmission mode
  • the normal terminal device sends the PUCCH in the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment and the normal terminal equipment have the same start symbol S1 of the first hop for sending PUCCH, and the low-complexity terminal equipment and the normal terminal equipment have the same start symbol S2 of the second hop for sending PUCCH, so the network equipment can be used as
  • the PUCCH parameters configured by the normal terminal equipment do not need to configure PUCCH resources, more PUCCH parameters, etc. for the low-complexity terminal equipment separately, which can save signaling overhead.
  • the time (in seconds/milliseconds/microseconds) required for a general terminal device to perform frequency tuning does not vary with the SCS, but if the SCS is large, the low-complexity terminal device will exceed the support of the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment needs more symbols for frequency tuning; on the contrary, if the SCS is small, then the low-complexity terminal equipment exceeds the low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the PUCCH is sent within the frequency range of the maximum supported channel bandwidth, the low-complexity terminal equipment needs fewer symbols for frequency tuning.
  • frequency tuning only needs to switch frequency points, so the time required for frequency tuning is shorter.
  • the shortest time period required for frequency tuning is about 50 microseconds, and the longest time period is generally about 200 microseconds.
  • Table 3 shows the correspondence between the size of the SCS and the number of symbols required for frequency tuning by the low-complexity terminal device. Table 3 takes the time required for frequency tuning as an example of 140 microseconds.
  • the value of X can be determined according to the size of the SCS.
  • the SCS is small, the X is correspondingly small, which can reduce the resource overhead and the transmission delay of the PUCCH; when the SCS is large, the X is correspondingly large, so as to leave enough time for the terminal equipment to perform frequency tuning.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment needs to delete some symbols in the PUCCH when sending the PUCCH because the terminal equipment does not have enough time for frequency tuning, which affects the performance of the low-complexity terminal equipment for sending PUCCH.
  • the value of X has the following three cases, and the three cases are described below.
  • the first threshold may be determined according to the time period required for the terminal device to perform frequency tuning.
  • the first threshold is predefined or configured.
  • Table 3 is only an example. In some embodiments, the SCS is larger, and the value of X can also be larger accordingly, for example, 42 and so on.
  • X may be equal to 14 even if the SCS is greater than or equal to the first threshold.
  • the SCS is greater than or equal to the first threshold
  • the number of symbols of the PUCCH is greater than or equal to the second threshold
  • the second threshold can also be considered as the minimum number of symbols used for transmitting the uplink channel.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment needs 16 symbols for frequency tuning.
  • the minimum number of PUCCH symbols supported by low-complexity terminal equipment is specified to be 4
  • the ratio of symbols discarded by low-complexity terminal equipment to the number of PUCCH symbols due to frequency tuning will be less than or equal to 50%.
  • This embodiment of the present application may predefine or configure the second threshold, or predefine or configure the maximum proportion of symbols discarded by low-complexity terminal equipment due to frequency tuning to the number of PUCCH symbols, for example, the maximum proportion is specified to be 50% or 20% .
  • the second transmission mode is: the first hop of the uplink channel is sent in the mth time slot, and the second hop of the uplink channel is sent in the m+hth time slot, wherein the symbol used for sending the first hop is the The last symbol is X symbols apart from the first symbol in the symbols used for sending the second hop, where X is a positive integer, m is a positive integer, and h is greater than or equal to 0.
  • X is related to SCS.
  • X is related to the number of symbols L of the uplink channel and the number of symbols or the maximum number of symbols N that can be used for frequency tuning when the terminal device transmits the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • X is related to SCS and L and N. It should be understood that the first hop of the uplink channel and the second hop of the uplink channel belong to the same uplink channel, that is, one uplink channel is sent in the mth time slot and the m+hth time slot.
  • the second transmission mode also specifies that a PUCCH is sent in a frequency hopping manner in one or more time slots, and the first hop of the PUCCH and the second hop of the PUCCH are different. spaced by X symbols.
  • frequency tuning can be performed within these X symbols without affecting the PUCCH
  • the transmission and/or reception of the PUCCH can reduce the degradation of the PUCCH transmission performance of the low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • X may be determined according to L and N, so as to reduce the delay of sending the PUCCH as much as possible, and to save the resource overhead as much as possible, which is more flexible.
  • the relationship between L, N, and X has the following three cases.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resources for sending PUCCH by a low-complexity terminal device.
  • FIG. 13 takes L+N less than 14 as an example.
  • L+N is less than 14
  • X is greater than or equal to 14
  • the delay in sending PUCCH will obviously be reduced. Therefore, in this case, X can be greater than or equal to N, which can not only ensure that the terminal equipment has enough time to perform frequency tuning, but also will not affect the performance of the terminal equipment to send PUCCH, and can minimize the delay of sending PUCCH.
  • L2 L-L1.
  • the second transmission mode actually sends one PUCCH in one time slot.
  • the difference from the current intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode is that there is an interval of X symbols between the first hop of the PUCCH and the second hop of the PUCCH.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resources for sending PUCCH by a low-complexity terminal device.
  • Figure 13 takes L+N greater than 14 as an example.
  • L+N is greater than 14
  • X is less than 14
  • the terminal device may not have enough time to perform frequency tuning, which will cause the terminal device to drop some symbols of PUCCH when sending PUCCH, thus affecting the performance of sending PUCCH. Therefore, in this case, the embodiment of the present application may determine that X is greater than or equal to 14 ⁇ n, so as to ensure that the terminal device has enough time to perform frequency tuning.
  • a network device may configure X.
  • the network device may broadcast a system message, and the system message may carry the value of X.
  • the network device may also configure X for each terminal device; alternatively, the network device may also configure X with the same value for the first type of terminal device, and configure X with the same value for the second type of terminal device.
  • the network device may also configure X for each cell, or BWP, or each SCS, respectively. Wherein, each cell can correspond to one candidate value or multiple candidate values of X, and similarly, each BWP can correspond to one candidate value or multiple candidate values of X; each SCS can correspond to one candidate value or multiple candidate values of X candidate value.
  • X may be predefined, eg, one candidate value of X is predefined for each cell, or BWP or each SCS.
  • multiple candidate values of X are predefined for each cell, BWP or each SCS.
  • the network device may select one candidate value from the multiple candidate values, and inform the terminal device to use the candidate value to send the PUCCH.
  • the terminal device may select a candidate value from the plurality of candidate values according to the reported capability information or assistance information, use the candidate value to send the PUCCH, and notify the network device of the candidate value.
  • the correspondence between the candidate values of SCS and the candidate values of X may be predefined, for example, Table 4. If one candidate value of SCS corresponds to multiple candidate values of X, the network device may select one candidate value from the multiple candidate values to inform the low-complexity terminal device to send the PUCCH according to the value. Alternatively, the low-complexity terminal device can also report capability information or auxiliary information to select a candidate value from the multiple candidate values, and notify the network device to send the PUCCH according to the candidate value, which is more flexible. For example, a low-complexity terminal device selects a candidate value from the multiple values according to its own capabilities.
  • the network device can use 1 bit to indicate whether X is X1 or X2, or the terminal device reporting capability information indicates whether X1 or X2. It should be understood that once X1 or X2 is determined, the X value corresponding to each SCS is determined.
  • the N may also be predefined, or preconfigured. As described above, when N is defined, the X is determined according to the N and according to a certain rule, or the X is determined according to the configuration of the network device.
  • N may be predefined, eg, one candidate value of N is predefined for each cell, or BWP or each SCS.
  • multiple candidate values of N are predefined for each cell, BWP or each SCS.
  • the network device may select one candidate value from the multiple candidate values, and inform the terminal device to use the candidate value.
  • the terminal device may report capability information or auxiliary information to select one candidate value from the plurality of candidate values, inform the network device, and use the candidate value.
  • the correspondence between the candidate values of SCS and the candidate values of N can be predefined, for example, Table 5.
  • the network device may use 1 bit to indicate whether N is N1 or N2, or the terminal device reporting capability information indicates whether it is N1 or N2. It should be understood that once N1 or N2 is determined, the N value corresponding to each SCS is determined.
  • SCS N1 N2 (corresponding to 1ms) 15KHz 2 14 30KHz 4 28 60KHz 8 56 120KHz 16 112
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resources for transmitting uplink channels by a low-complexity terminal device.
  • the low-complexity terminal device transmits the first hop of the first PUCCH with the first frequency domain resource in the time slot m, and transmits the second hop of the first PUCCH with the second frequency domain resource after an interval of X symbols.
  • X is predefined or configured by the network, considering that the terminal device may send PUCCH repeatedly, the interval between the end symbol of the previous hop and the start symbol of the next hop between two adjacent frequency hops is X. symbol.
  • X can be as close as possible to the number of symbols used for frequency tuning by the terminal equipment, so that the increase in time delay can be avoided as much as possible on the premise of ensuring that the terminal equipment performs frequency tuning at certain intervals.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resources for transmitting uplink channels by a low-complexity terminal device.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment sends the first hop of the first PUCCH with the first frequency domain resource in the time slot m, and after an interval of X symbols, sends the second hop of the first PUCCH with the second frequency domain resource; At an interval of X symbols, the first hop of the second PUCCH is sent with the first frequency domain resource, and then at an interval of X symbols, the second hop of the second PUCCH is sent with the second frequency domain resource, and so on.
  • Both the aforementioned first transmission mode and the second transmission mode specify an interval of X symbols between the first hop of the uplink channel and the second hop of the uplink channel.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a third-frequency transmission mode.
  • the third transmission mode specifies the relationship between the number of the start symbol of the first hop of the upstream channel and the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the upstream channel.
  • the low-complexity terminal device can determine the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel according to the relationship between the number of the start symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel, and send the upstream channel.
  • the third transmission mode is: sending the first hop of the uplink channel with L1 symbols in the mth time slot, and sending the second hop of the uplink channel with L2 symbols in the m+hth time slot.
  • the first hop of the upstream channel and the second hop of the upstream channel belong to the same upstream channel, that is, an upstream channel is sent in the mth time slot and the m+hth time slot.
  • the number of the first symbol in the L1 symbols is S1
  • the number of the first symbol in the L2 symbols is S2
  • S2 and S1 satisfy any one of the following relationships:
  • S2 S1. That is, the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the upstream channel is the same as the number of the start symbol of the first hop of the upstream channel.
  • the interval between the end symbol of the first hop of the upstream channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the upstream channel is 14-L1 symbols. Since there are 14-L1 symbols between the end symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel, even if the low-complexity terminal device transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, it can still Frequency tuning is performed on these 14-L1 symbols, thereby reducing the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance of low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the low-complexity terminal device can determine the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH and the number of the start symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH.
  • the numbers of the start symbols of the second hop are the same.
  • network devices can uniformly configure common PUCCH resources (formats) through system messages, and there is no need to configure separate PUCCH formats for low-complexity terminal devices, which can reduce signaling overhead and resource overhead.
  • the current PUCCH format is used to configure the PUCCH resource for the terminal device, then the candidate PUCCH symbol position of each time slot remains unchanged, which is more compatible with the prior art.
  • the interval between the end symbol of the first hop of the upstream channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the upstream channel is 14-2 ⁇ L1. Since the end symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel are separated by 14-2 ⁇ L1 symbols, even if the low-complexity terminal device transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, Frequency tuning can also be performed on these 14-2 ⁇ L1 symbols, thereby reducing the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance of low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • the interval between the end symbol of the first hop of the uplink channel and the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel is 14-2 ⁇ L1 symbols, that is, the interval is as few symbols as possible, so as to reduce the delay of transmitting the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device may select one candidate value from the three candidate values of S2 when sending the uplink channel. For example, for a certain SCS, the terminal device may determine, according to L and N, from the multiple candidate value sets of S2 from which candidate value set to select a candidate value of S2, which is more flexible.
  • S2 can be selected from a set of candidate values, which can be [S1+L1, S1-L1], [S1+L1, S1] or [S1, S1-L1], or a set of candidate values is [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1].
  • the terminal device selects one or more candidate value sets from multiple candidate value sets, and there may be the following three situations.
  • One or more candidate value sets may be predefined by the protocol, or preconfigured by the network device, or determined according to the capability information/assistance information reported by the terminal device. Once one or more candidate value sets are determined, the network device can pre-configure or dynamically indicate which candidate value to use, or first determine the available candidate value set from the one or more candidate sets according to predefined rules, and then dynamically indicate from the one or more candidate value sets. Indicates an element in the set of available candidate values.
  • the set of available candidate values includes the 3 candidate values.
  • Case nine if 14-L1 is greater than or equal to N, and 14-2 ⁇ L1 is less than N.
  • the set of available candidate values includes 2 candidate values: [S1+L1, S1].
  • the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel may correspond to multiple candidate positions of time domain resources.
  • the first hop of the uplink channel is located in the time slot m
  • the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel may be located in the time slot.
  • m+1 can also be located in time slot m+2.
  • the candidate positions of the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel may include 3 time domain positions corresponding to S2 of time slot m+1, and 3 time domain positions corresponding to S2 of time slot m+2, a total of 6 Location.
  • 14-L1 is less than N
  • 14-2 ⁇ L1 is greater than or equal to N
  • S2 can be an element in [S21, S22, S23, S24, S25, S26]
  • 14-L1 is greater than or equal to N
  • 14-2 ⁇ L1 is less than N
  • S2 can be an element of [S21, S22, S24, S25, S26].
  • the aforementioned first transmission mode, second transmission mode and third transmission mode are intended for the application scenario in which the low-complexity terminal device transmits an uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and specifies the first hop of the uplink channel and the duration of the uplink channel. A certain number of symbols are spaced between the second hops. That is, time is reserved for the low-complexity terminal equipment to perform frequency tuning, and the transmission performance of the uplink channel caused by frequency tuning is minimized when the low-complexity terminal equipment transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the network device configures the normal terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel, and the network device configures the low-complexity terminal device to send the uplink channel once, that is, to send one uplink channel.
  • the network device configures the first PUCCH resource for the normal terminal device, and configures or indicates the parameters shown in Table 1.
  • the network device configures the second PUCCH resource for the low-complexity terminal device, for example, the network device configures the second PUCCH format for the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the network equipment configures the parameters shown in Table 6-1 for low-complexity terminal equipment.
  • network equipment can be low-complexity terminal equipment and normal
  • the terminal equipment is configured with the same frequency domain resources.
  • the network device configures the same BWP for the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device.
  • the BWPs configured by the network device for the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device are different, but the frequency domain resources configured by the network device for the low-complexity terminal device are the same as the frequency domain resources configured by the network device for the normal terminal device.
  • Table 6-2 shows the frequency domain parameters configured by the network device for the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the low-complexity terminal device can still send the PUCCH using the aforementioned first transmission mode, second transmission mode, or third transmission mode.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment may also transmit the PUCCH by using the transmission mode of frequency hopping within the time slot.
  • the network device can configure the parameters of the transmission mode shown in Table 6-3 for the low-complexity terminal device.
  • different time-frequency resources occupied by different terminal devices will reduce mutual interference between the terminal devices, so as to improve the performance of uplink transmission as much as possible.
  • the interference between the terminal devices can also be reduced by means of code division multiplexing.
  • the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device coexist, in order to make the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device better share the PUCCH resources to save resource overhead.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment and the normal terminal equipment can be prevented from occupying the same time-frequency resources as much as possible.
  • the network device configures the normal terminal device to send the PUCCH in time slot m or time slot m+1, and instructs the low-complexity terminal device to use the second PUCCH resource to send the PUCCH.
  • the time domain resource corresponding to the second PUCCH resource includes time slot m and time slot m+1. Since in time slot m and time slot m+1, normal terminal equipment transmits PUCCH in the configured frequency domain resources, in order to avoid overlapping time-frequency resources of low-complexity terminal equipment and normal terminal equipment, low-complexity terminal equipment and normal terminal equipment Terminal equipment can use different frequency resources.
  • the network device may configure the normal terminal device and the low-complexity terminal device to send the first hop of the PUCCH to have different starting frequency domain positions, and configure the normal terminal device and the low-complexity terminal device to send the first hop of the PUCCH.
  • the starting frequency domain positions of the second hop of the PUCCH are different.
  • the starting frequency domain position of the first hop of the PUCCH of the normal terminal equipment is the same as the starting frequency domain position of the second hop of the PUCCH of the low-complexity terminal equipment, and the starting frequency domain position of the second hop of the PUCCH of the normal terminal equipment
  • the location is the same as the starting frequency domain location of the first hop of the PUCCH of the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the time domain position of the first hop of the PUCCH of the normal terminal device may be the same as the time domain position of the first hop of the PUCCH of the low-complexity terminal device, which can save resource overhead.
  • the network device configures the normal terminal device to send the PUCCH in a frequency hopping transmission mode within the time slot, and the number of times N repeat of sending the PUCCH is greater than 1.
  • the network device configures the starting PRB number of the first PUCCH resource, eg, the first PRB, and the network device configures the starting PRB number of the second hop for frequency hopping transmission of the first PUCCH resource, eg, the second PRB.
  • the network device configures the low-complexity terminal device to transmit the PUCCH in a frequency-hopping transmission manner across time slots (eg, the first transmission manner or the second transmission manner or the third transmission manner).
  • the starting PRB number of the second PUCCH resource configured by the network device is the second PRB
  • the starting PRB number of the second hop of the frequency hopping transmission of the second PUCCH resource configured by the network device is the first PRB.
  • the network device may configure the same PUCCH resource for all terminal devices, as well as the starting PRB number of the first PUCCH resource and the starting PRB number of the second hop for frequency hopping transmission of the first PUCCH resource.
  • a normal terminal device can send the PUCCH using the configuration of the network device.
  • the network device may additionally dynamically indicate the starting PRB number of the second PUCCH resource and the starting PRB number of the second hop for frequency hopping transmission of the second PUCCH resource.
  • the network device configures the starting PRB number of the first PUCCH resource as the first PRB, and the starting PRB number of the second hop in the frequency hopping transmission of the first PUCCH resource is the second PRB.
  • a normal terminal device may use the first PUCCH resource to send the PUCCH.
  • the network device may send indication information to the low-complexity terminal equipment, where the indication information is used to indicate that the starting frequency domain position of the first hop of the PUCCH of the low-complexity terminal equipment is the second PRB, and the low-complexity terminal equipment The starting frequency domain position of the second hop of the PUCCH of the terminal equipment is the first PRB.
  • the indication information may be used to instruct the low-complexity device terminal device to update the configured first PRB to the second PRB and to update the configured second PRB to the first PRB when sending the PUCCH.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a low-complexity terminal device and a normal terminal device sending time-frequency resources of PUCCH.
  • Fig. 17 is an example of a normal terminal equipment repeatedly sending PUCCH twice, and sending PUCCH by frequency hopping in a time slot.
  • FIG. 17 uses the low-complexity terminal device to send the PUCCH once, and takes the first transmission mode as an example.
  • the starting PRB number of the first PUCCH resource configured by the network device is the first PRB
  • the starting PRB number of the second hop of the frequency hopping transmission of the first PUCCH resource is the second PRB.
  • the network device may configure the starting PRB number of the second PUCCH resource as the second PRB, and the starting PRB number of the second hop in the frequency hopping transmission of the first PUCCH resource as the first PRB.
  • the low-complexity terminal device sends the PUCCH in the first transmission mode, it can share the PUCCH resource with the normal terminal device.
  • the low-complexity terminal device and the normal terminal device occupy different frequency domain resources to transmit the PUCCH, thereby saving resource overhead.
  • the second hop of the PUCCH of the low-complexity terminal equipment can be sent later, so the already configured first PUCCH can still be used.
  • the network device may configure the low-complexity terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel for multiple times, that is, to send multiple uplink channels.
  • the network device may use the method of repeatedly sending the uplink channel for the normal configuration to implement the configuration of the low-complexity terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel for many times.
  • the network device may configure the number of repeated time slots in a PUCCH format by configuring the nrofSlots parameter.
  • the network device may also configure the low-complexity terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel R times by configuring the number R of uplink channels to be sent by the low-complexity terminal device. It should be understood that the R may also be indicated by the network device through dynamic signaling, such as through DCI or MAC CE.
  • the network device may configure the low-complexity terminal device with parameters such as those shown in Tables 6-1 to 6-3. It is assumed that the frequency domain resources used by the network device to configure/instruct the low-complexity terminal device to send the uplink channel are consecutive Nf PRB resources.
  • the number of the starting frequency domain position of the first hop of the first uplink channel that is preconfigured or dynamically indicated by the network device for R times of repeated transmission is the first PRB, and the starting frequency domain position after frequency hopping (that is, the second hop) The number is the second PRB.
  • the first PRB and/or the second PRB may be preconfigured by the network device, or dynamically indicated by the network device, or determined according to the network device's instruction and predefined rules.
  • the uplink channel is PUSCH
  • the frequency domain resource allocation (FDRA) field in the DCI scheduling PDSCH may indicate the first PRB.
  • the second PRB may be preconfigured by the network device, or calculated according to the frequency domain offset indicated by the network device and the first PRB. For example, the second PRB and the first PRB can be calculated according to the following formula.
  • the second PRB represents the first PRB
  • offset represents the frequency domain offset indicated by the network device
  • the BWP may be the initial uplink BWP or the activated uplink BWP of the low-complexity terminal device, or the uplink BWP indicated by the network device and specially used for calculating the uplink channel resource.
  • the network device may indicate that the first hop of the first repeated transmission of the R times of repeated transmission is located in the time slot m.
  • the uplink channel is PUCCH
  • the uplink channel is PUSCH
  • the low-complexity terminal device can send the uplink channel by using a frequency hopping transmission mode across time slots.
  • Frequency hopping transmission mode across time slots such as the first transmission mode or the second transmission mode or the third transmission mode, all specify that the end of the first hop of an uplink channel coincides with the start symbol of the second hop by a certain amount symbol for frequency tuning.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment repeatedly transmits the uplink channel on the configured resources. In two consecutive transmissions, the interval between the last symbol of the second hop of the i-th uplink channel and the first symbol of the first hop of the i+1-th uplink channel may be different by a certain number of symbols. Low enough complexity end equipment for frequency tuning.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment hops from the second hop of the i-th uplink channel to the first hop of the i+1-th uplink channel. Obviously, it is not necessary to perform frequency hopping to avoid the performance loss caused by discarding symbols. .
  • the uplink channel when the uplink channel is repeatedly sent multiple times, it may be determined whether to perform frequency hopping between the second hop of the i-th uplink channel to the first hop of the i+1-th uplink channel, so as to Try to avoid the performance penalty of discarding symbols. It should be understood that the first hop of the uplink channel that repeats the first time in R times is transmitted in time slot m.
  • the second hop of the first uplink channel may be in time slot m, or in time slot m+1 or time slot m+2, etc., except The first hops of the upstream channels other than the first time are located in time slot m+1 or time slot m+2 and so on.
  • the first hop of the i-th uplink channel in the R repetitions may be located in time slot m+h as an example. It should be understood that h is a positive integer, and i is greater than or equal to 2.
  • the time-frequency resources occupied by the uplink channel of different times include the following two situations.
  • mod means a modulo operation, that is, "h mod x” means the remainder of dividing h by x. Indicates rounded up.
  • the low-complexity terminal device is in the time slot m+h, the first The upstream channel is sent repeatedly, and the first hop of the upstream channel is sent.
  • the time domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are consecutive L1 symbols of the time slot m+h starting from the start symbol S1.
  • the low-complexity terminal device is in the time slot m+h, the th The uplink channel is sent repeatedly, and the second hop of the uplink channel, that is, L2 symbols, is sent.
  • the time domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are consecutive L2 symbols starting from the start symbol S2 in the time slot m+h.
  • the frequency domain resources used are Nf consecutive PRB resources starting from the first PRB.
  • the upstream channel W is a repetition of the upstream channel U.
  • the uplink channel W is a repetition of the uplink channel U, which means that the content carried by the uplink channel W is the same as the content carried by the uplink channel U.
  • the remaining parameters of the upstream channel W and the upstream channel U such as redundancy version (RV), may be different.
  • RV redundancy version
  • the first time that is, the time slot of the first hop in which the uplink channel W is sent for the second time is time slot m+2.
  • the time slot m is used to send the first hop of the uplink channel U
  • the time slot m+1 is used to send the second hop of the uplink channel U
  • the time slot m+3 is used to send the second hop of the uplink channel W.
  • the frequency domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal device are consecutive Nf PRB resources starting from the second PRB. That is, the low-complexity terminal device starts from symbol S1 on time slot m+2, and transmits L1 symbols on consecutive Nf PRB resources starting from the second PRB.
  • the low-complexity terminal device transmits the uplink channel by using the cross-slot transmission mode, so the time slot of the second hop when the uplink channel W is sent for the second time is time slot m+3.
  • the low-complexity terminal device starts from symbol S2 on time slot m+3, and transmits L2 symbols on consecutive Nf PRB resources starting from the first PRB.
  • frequency hopping is performed between the second hop of the i-th uplink channel to the first hop of the i+1-th uplink channel.
  • the low-complexity terminal device is in the time slot m+h, the first The upstream channel is sent repeatedly, and the first hop of the upstream channel is sent.
  • the time domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are consecutive L1 symbols of the time slot m+h starting from the start symbol S1.
  • the frequency domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are Nf consecutive PRB resources starting from the first PRB.
  • the low-complexity terminal device is in the time slot m+h, the th The uplink channel is sent repeatedly, and the second hop of the uplink channel, that is, L2 symbols, is sent.
  • the time domain resource used by the low-complexity terminal equipment is the consecutive L2 symbols of the time slot m+h starting from the start symbol S2.
  • the frequency domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are Nf consecutive PRB resources starting from the second PRB.
  • the first time that is, the time slot of the first hop in which the uplink channel W is sent for the second time is time slot m+2.
  • the time slot m is used to send the first hop of the uplink channel U
  • the time slot m+1 is used to send the second hop of the uplink channel U
  • the time slot m+3 is used to send the second hop of the uplink channel W.
  • the frequency domain resources used by the low-complexity terminal equipment are Nf consecutive PRB resources starting from the first PRB. That is, the low-complexity terminal device starts from symbol S1 on time slot m+2, and sends L1 symbols on consecutive Nf PRB resources starting from the first PRB.
  • the low-complexity terminal device transmits the uplink channel by using the cross-slot transmission mode, so the time slot of the second hop when the uplink channel W is sent for the second time is time slot m+3.
  • the low-complexity terminal device starts from symbol S2 on time slot m+3, and transmits L2 symbols on consecutive Nf PRB resources starting from the second PRB.
  • the network device may configure the low-complexity terminal device to send the uplink channel according to the first case or the second case.
  • the network device instructs the low-complexity terminal device to configure the sending of the uplink channel according to the first situation or the second situation through dynamic signaling.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment configuration may be predefined to send the uplink channel according to the first or second situation.
  • a low-complexity terminal device configuration may be predefined to send the uplink channel according to the first case.
  • the low-complexity terminal device may transmit the uplink channel according to the second case. That is, if Q is greater than or equal to N, the frequency domain resources used for the i+1th transmission of the first hop of a certain uplink channel are the same as the frequency domain resources used for the ith transmission of the first hop of the uplink channel. Conversely, if Q is less than N, then the low-complexity terminal device may transmit the uplink channel according to case one. That is, the frequency domain resources of the first hop used for the i+1 th transmission of a certain uplink channel are the same as the frequency domain resources of the second hop used for the i th transmission of the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device when frequency hopping transmission is performed within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, if N/L is greater than (or greater than or equal to) the preset threshold, the terminal device performs the first transmission method as described above, or The second transmission mode or the third transmission mode sends the uplink channel. If N/L is less than or equal to (or less than) the preset threshold, the terminal device still sends the uplink channel according to the transmission mode of frequency hopping in the time slot.
  • the aforementioned first transmission mode, second transmission mode and third transmission mode are intended for the application scenario in which the low-complexity terminal device transmits an uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, and specifies the first hop of the uplink channel and the duration of the uplink channel. A certain number of symbols are spaced between the second hops. That is, there is time for the low-complexity terminal equipment to perform frequency tuning, and the transmission performance of the uplink channel caused by frequency tuning is minimized when the low-complexity terminal equipment transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides another transmission manner to avoid performance loss of uplink channel transmission caused by frequency tuning.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment may not support the transmission mode of frequency hopping within the time slot, and the low-complexity terminal equipment transmits the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold. .
  • the fourth transmission mode is as follows: the low-complexity terminal equipment repeatedly transmits the uplink channel R times, and repeats the ith time of the R times to transmit the uplink channel W in the mth time slot, and performs the transmission in the m+hth time slot.
  • the i+1 th of the R times is repeated and the uplink channel U is transmitted, and the uplink channel U is a repetition of the uplink channel W.
  • the number of the starting symbol used to send the uplink channel W in the mth time slot is the same as the number of the start symbol used to send the uplink channel U in the m+hth time slot.
  • the number of symbols used to send the uplink channel W is the same as the number of symbols used to send the uplink channel U in the m+hth time slot, and the frequency domain resources used to send the uplink channel W and the frequency domain resources used to send the uplink channel U The frequency domain resources are different.
  • the low-complexity terminal device can send the uplink channel by repeatedly sending 2 time slots, and the execution is performed between two adjacent repeated transmissions. Frequency hopping between time slots.
  • the uplink channel can still be sent by sending one time slot, and the transmission mode of frequency hopping within the time slot is adopted.
  • the network device configures the terminal device to repeatedly send the uplink channel E times in the frequency hopping transmission mode within the time slot
  • the low-complexity terminal device can send the uplink channel by repeatedly sending 2E time slots, and the adjacent 2 Inter-slot frequency hopping is performed between repeated transmissions.
  • the uplink channel can still be sent by repeatedly sending E time slots, and frequency hopping between time slots is performed between two adjacent repeated transmissions.
  • the uplink channel is the Msg3 PUSCH in the RACH process.
  • the random access response uplink grant (RAR UL grant, random access response) or the frequency hopping indication field in the DCI domain instructs the terminal device to send the Msg3 PUSCH in the form of frequency hopping (for example, the frequency hopping indication field is set to 0), then The low-complexity terminal device sends the Msg3 PUSCH once, and sends it in a frequency-free manner.
  • the random access response uplink grant (RAR UL grant, random access response) or the frequency hopping indication field in the DCI field instructs the terminal device to send the Msg3 PUSCH in the form of frequency hopping (for example, the frequency hopping indication field is set to 1).
  • the frequency hopping indication field is set to 1.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH of 2 time slots can be repeatedly sent, and the 2 time Frequency hopping between slots.
  • the network device configures the symbol length of Msg3 PUSCH in 1 slot to be L, and the start symbol in 1 slot is S1, and S1 and L are indicated by the RAR UL grant or the TDRA field in the DCI field.
  • the low-complexity terminal device transmits the Msg3 PUSCH for the first time in the time slot m
  • the low-complexity terminal device can transmit the Msg3 PUSCH for the second time in the time slot m+1.
  • the length of Msg3 PUSCH symbols sent in time slot m and time slot m+1 are both L
  • the starting symbols in time slot m and time slot m+1 are both S1.
  • RAR UL grant schedules Msg3 PUSCH
  • n represents the time slot where the PDSCH carrying the RAR UL grant is located
  • k2 is the time slot offset indicated by the TDRA field in the RAR UL grant field
  • delta is a predefined value.
  • Msg3 PUSCH is scheduled by the DCI
  • m n+k2
  • n represents the time slot where the PDCCH carrying the DCI is located
  • k2 is the time slot offset indicated by the TDRA field in the DCI field.
  • the frequency domain resource of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in the time slot m is indicated by the RAR UL grant or the FDRA domain in the DCI domain.
  • the frequency domain resource indication includes an initial PRB number, such as the first PRB, and a frequency domain resource width, such as Nf consecutive PRBs. It should be understood that the frequency domain resource width of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in the time slot m+1 is also Nf consecutive PRBs.
  • the BWP bandwidth of the frequency range is jointly determined. See, for example, formula (1) above.
  • the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in the time slot m, and the frequency domain resource of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in the time slot m+1 The starting PRB number of can also be adapted according to m. For example, if m is an even number, then the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in time slot m is the first PRB, and the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in time slot m+1 The starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource is the second PRB.
  • the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource of the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in time slot m is the second PRB, and the Msg3 PUSCH sent by the low-complexity terminal device in time slot m+1
  • the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource is the first PRB.
  • the network device configures or instructs the low-complexity terminal device to repeatedly send the Msg3 PUSCH R times in a frequency hopping manner within the time slot.
  • the low-complexity terminal device does not support frequency hopping within a time slot and sends the Msg3 PUSCH in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, the low-complexity terminal device can send the Msg3 PUSCH by repeatedly sending R or 2R time slots, And frequency hopping between time slots is performed between two adjacent repeated transmissions.
  • the low-complexity terminal device sends the Msg3 PUSCH by repeatedly sending R time slots, or whether to send the Msg3 PUSCH through 2R time slots, which can be preconfigured by the network device or indicated by dynamic signaling. Alternatively, it can also be determined according to the capability information or auxiliary information of the low-complexity terminal device. For example, the network device determines according to the capability information or auxiliary information reported by the low-complexity terminal device. Or it can be predefined. For example, the Msg3 PUSCH is transmitted through 2R slots by default.
  • the Msg3 PUSCH of R time slots is repeatedly sent; If the interval between the last symbol of the Msg3 PUSCH transmitted in the i-th time and the first symbol of the Msg3 PUSCH in the i+1-th transmission is less than N, then the Msg3 PUSCH of 2R time slots is repeatedly transmitted.
  • the uplink channel is the PUCCH fed back by the HARQ of Msg4 in the RACH process.
  • the symbol length of the PUCCH resource indicated by the network device is L, and the starting symbol is S1.
  • the network device instructs the low-complexity terminal device to send HARQ feedback for Msg4 at slot m.
  • the low-complexity terminal device may repeatedly send 2 PUCCHs in time slot m and time slot m+1.
  • the number of PUCCH symbols sent in time slot m and the number of PUCCH symbols sent in time slot m+1 are both L, and the starting symbols in time slot m and time slot m+1 are both S1.
  • the frequency-hopping mode is used to transmit between time slot m and time slot m+1, that is, in time slot m, the PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the low-complexity terminal equipment is the first PRB, and in time slot m+1, the low-complexity terminal device uses the PRB number of the first PRB.
  • the PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the terminal device is the second PRB.
  • the first PRB and the second PRB may be jointly determined according to the indication of the network device and the predefined PRB offset.
  • scenario 1 and scenario 2 if the low-complexity terminal device repeatedly transmits the PUCCH twice adjacently, the end symbol of the i-th transmission of the uplink channel U and the i+1-th transmission of the start symbol of the uplink channel W are equal to each other. If the number of symbols Q in the interval is greater than or equal to the number of symbols N corresponding to the duration required for the low-complexity terminal equipment to perform frequency hopping, that is, to perform frequency tuning, the low-complexity terminal equipment can complete frequency tuning within Q symbols.
  • the low-complexity terminal device does not need to repeatedly send the uplink channel more times, that is, the low-complexity terminal device can send the uplink channel according to the number of repetitions indicated by the network device.
  • the first PUCCH transmission among the E times is repeated in the mth slot.
  • the low-complexity terminal device if the low-complexity terminal device repeatedly transmits the PUCCH twice adjacently, the number of symbols Q in the interval between the end symbol of the i-th transmission of the uplink channel U and the i+1-th transmission of the start symbol of the uplink channel W is smaller than the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the complexity is the number of symbols N corresponding to the duration required for the terminal equipment to perform frequency hopping, that is, to perform frequency tuning. Then even a low-complexity terminal device is not sufficient to complete frequency tuning within Q symbols. In this case, the low-complexity terminal equipment can repeatedly transmit the uplink channel more times.
  • the frequency-hopping mode is used to send between two adjacent time slots, that is, in time slot m, the PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the low-complexity terminal equipment is the first PRB, and in time slot m+1, the low-complexity terminal equipment
  • the PRB number of the adopted frequency domain resource is the second PRB.
  • the first PRB and the second PRB may be jointly determined according to the indication of the network device and the predefined PRB offset.
  • the low-complexity terminal device if the low-complexity terminal device repeatedly transmits the PUCCH twice adjacently, the number of symbols Q in the interval between the end symbol of the i-th transmission of the uplink channel U and the i+1-th transmission of the start symbol of the uplink channel W is less than
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment performs frequency hopping, that is, the number of symbols N corresponding to the duration required for performing frequency tuning.
  • Low-complexity terminal equipment needs to discard some symbols of uplink channel U/or uplink channel W.
  • the preset threshold may be determined according to the ratio of the number of symbols to be discarded to the number of symbols of the uplink channel to be transmitted.
  • the preset threshold may be referred to as the first value.
  • the first value may be pre-configured by a network device or predefined by a protocol, for example, the first value is 10% or 20%.
  • the first value may also be determined according to the capability information or auxiliary information reported by the low-complexity terminal device.
  • the symbols discarded by the low-complexity terminal equipment may be the partial symbols at the end of the i-th PUCCH, or may be the partial symbols at the beginning of the i+1-th PUCCH.
  • the symbols discarded by the low-complexity terminal device may be the partial symbols at the end of the i-th PUCCH, and the partial symbols at the beginning of the i+1-th PUCCH. Which symbols are specifically discarded may be pre-configured by the network device, or predefined by the protocol, or indicated by the network device through dynamic signaling.
  • whether to send the uplink channel in the four-transmission mode may be selected according to the ratio of the number of symbols to be discarded to the number of symbols of the uplink channel to be sent. For example, if N/L is greater than or equal to a preset threshold, the fourth transmission mode is adopted.
  • the network device instructs the low-complexity terminal device to send the PUCCH in an intra-slot frequency hopping manner.
  • the low-complexity terminal device transmits the PUCCH within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the low-complexity terminal device may transmit the PUCCH of 1 slot in the mth slot.
  • the PUCCH may be sent once in the mth time slot, and the PUCCH may be sent again in the m+1th time slot, that is, the PUCCH is repeatedly sent twice.
  • the PUCCH is repeatedly sent twice in the mth time slot and the m+hth time slot. That is, one PUCCH is sent in each time slot, the symbol length of the PUCCH in each time slot is L, and the starting symbol in each time slot is S1.
  • the frequency-hopping mode is used to send between two adjacent time slots, that is, in time slot m, the PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the low-complexity terminal equipment is the first PRB, and in time slot m+1, the low-complexity terminal equipment
  • the PRB number of the adopted frequency domain resource is the second PRB.
  • the first PRB and the second PRB may be jointly determined according to the indication of the network device and the predefined PRB offset.
  • the PUCCH is sent once in the mth time slot. That is, the low-complexity terminal equipment still transmits the PUCCH in the transmission mode of frequency hopping within the time slot, and only transmits the PUCCH once in the time slot m.
  • the start symbol of the first hop of the PUCCH is S1, and the length is the first L1 symbols among the L symbols.
  • the second hop start symbol of the PUCCH is S2, and the length is L-L1 symbols.
  • the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the first hop is the first PRB
  • the frequency domain width is Nf PRBs
  • the starting PRB number of the frequency domain resource used by the second hop is the second PRB
  • the frequency domain width is Nf PRBs.
  • the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, and the third transmission mode are directed to the application scenario in which the low-complexity terminal device sends an uplink channel in the range where the first bandwidth threshold is exceeded, A certain number of symbols are specified between the first hop of the upstream channel and the second hop of the upstream channel. That is, time is reserved for the low-complexity terminal equipment to perform frequency tuning, so as to minimize the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance caused by the low-complexity terminal equipment performing frequency tuning when the low-complexity terminal equipment transmits the uplink channel in the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold.
  • the fourth transmission mode specifies that the network device configures the terminal device to transmit the uplink channel in the frequency hopping transmission mode within the time slot, and specifies that the low-complexity terminal device shall repeat R times within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold and follow the time slot interval.
  • the transmission mode of frequency hopping sends the uplink channel. Since a certain number of symbols are also spaced between two adjacent times, the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance caused by frequency tuning can be reduced, and more symbols will be sent during repeated transmission. Therefore, the fourth transmission mode uses more More time-frequency resources are used to avoid the degradation of uplink channel transmission performance.
  • the foregoing describes the four transmission modes of the uplink channel newly introduced in the embodiments of the present application. Then, in combination with the existing transmission modes of the uplink channel, namely, the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission, the inter-time frequency hopping transmission mode, and the non-frequency hopping transmission mode, there are a total of 7 transmission modes of uplink channels.
  • the terminal device for receiving the PUCCH or transmitting the uplink channel, for example, it can be determined by the terminal device itself, or it can be determined by the terminal device itself.
  • the network device instructs the end device which transport to use.
  • the method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 as an example.
  • the method may be performed by two communication apparatuses, such as a first communication apparatus and a second communication apparatus, wherein the first communication apparatus may be a network device or capable of supporting functions required by the network device to implement the method or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method, and of course may also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required function can also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device
  • both the first communication device and the second communication device may be network devices.
  • the equipment, or both the first communication device and the second communication device are terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device, and the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the terminal device to implement the method, and so on.
  • the network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method is performed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a terminal device as an example.
  • the network devices described below may be network devices in the network architecture shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the embodiments of the present application only take the implementation of network equipment and terminal equipment as an example, and are not limited to these two communication apparatuses.
  • the embodiments of the present application may also be implemented by terminal devices and terminal devices, that is, both ends of the communication are terminal devices.
  • a terminal device determines a target transmission mode for transmitting an uplink channel.
  • the terminal device may determine a first transmission mode for uplink channel reception or uplink channel transmission from multiple transmission modes.
  • the network device is pre-configured or the protocol pre-defines which transmission mode the terminal device adopts, the terminal device does not need to select from multiple transmission modes.
  • the network device is pre-configured or the protocol is pre-defined for the low-complexity terminal device to send the uplink channel using the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, or the fourth transmission mode. Then the low-complexity terminal device adopts the configured or predefined transmission mode by default.
  • the multiple transmission modes may include at least two transmission modes among the above-mentioned seven transmission modes.
  • the at least two transmission modes include at least any one of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, and the fourth transmission mode, as well as the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode, and the inter-slot frequency hopping transmission mode and any of the non-frequency hopping transmission methods.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of a first transmission mode, a second transmission mode, a third transmission mode, and a fourth transmission mode, and a non-frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode and the fourth transmission mode, and the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode and the fourth transmission mode, and the frequency hopping transmission mode between time slots.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, and the fourth transmission mode, as well as a non-frequency hopping transmission mode and an intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode and the fourth transmission mode, as well as a non-frequency hopping transmission mode and an inter-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode and the fourth transmission mode, as well as the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode and the inter-slot frequency hopping transmission mode .
  • the multiple transmission modes include one or more of the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode and the fourth transmission mode, as well as the non-frequency hopping transmission mode, the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode and the time Slot hopping transmission mode.
  • the embodiment of the present application determines the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes, including the following two determination modes:
  • the first determination method the terminal device can determine the target transmission method according to the instruction of the network device.
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate any one of multiple transmission modes, such as the first transmission mode.
  • the first indication information can be carried in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, media access control element (media access control control element, MAC CE) signaling or downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) signaling one or more of etc.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • media access control element media access control control element
  • MAC CE media access control element
  • DCI downlink control information
  • One or more of the above fields may be fields defined in RRC signaling, fields defined in MAC CE signaling, or fields defined in DCI signaling, or may be newly defined RRC fields, MAC CE fields, or DCI fields. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application are not limited.
  • the first indication information may also be carried in newly defined signaling.
  • the first indication information may occupy one or more bits, and different bit states correspond to different transmission modes.
  • the multiple transmission modes include two transmission modes, and the first indication information occupies 1 bit.
  • multiple transmission modes include the first transmission mode and the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode.
  • the status of this one bit is "0" to indicate the first transmission mode, and the status of this one bit is "1" to indicate the time slot Internal frequency hopping transmission.
  • the state of the 1 bit being "0” may indicate the intra-slot frequency hopping transmission mode, and the state of the 1 bit being "1" may indicate the first transmission mode.
  • the multiple transmission modes include at least three transmission modes, and the first indication information may occupy at least 2 bits.
  • the first indication information may occupy at least 2 bits. Refer to Table 7 for the specific indication content of the exemplary first indication information.
  • the terminal device sends capability information to the network device, and accordingly, the network device receives the capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the cross-slot transmission mode.
  • the cross-slot transmission mode here may include one or more of a first transmission mode, a second transmission mode, a third transmission mode, and a fourth transmission mode.
  • the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the cross-slot transmission mode, and it can also be understood that the capability information can feed back whether the terminal device supports the cross-slot transmission mode.
  • Different terminal devices have different capabilities. For example, some terminal devices support the first transmission mode, and some terminal devices do not support the first transmission mode. It is obviously inappropriate if the network device instructs the terminal device that does not support the first transmission mode to use the first transmission mode to transmit the uplink channel. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device can determine the target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes according to the capability information reported by the terminal device, so as to avoid mismatch between the determined transmission mode and the capability of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device does not send capability information to the network device, and the terminal device may support the cross-slot transmission mode by default. That is, S2003 is an optional step, which is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 20 .
  • the capability information can reuse the capability information of the current terminal device.
  • the capability information may not reuse the capability information of the current terminal device, for example, called auxiliary information, which is used to indicate whether the terminal device supports the transmission mode across time slots.
  • the capability information may also include one or more parameters for assisting the terminal device in determining how to use the transmission across time slots.
  • the one or more parameters are used to instruct the terminal device which of the first transmission mode to the third situation in the first transmission manner.
  • the one or more parameters are used to instruct the terminal device which of the fourth to sixth cases in the second transmission manner is adopted.
  • the one or more parameters are used to instruct the terminal device to adopt which of the seventh to the ninth cases in the third transmission mode.
  • the one or more parameters are used to instruct the terminal device to use the fourth transmission mode when N/L is greater than or equal to the preset threshold.
  • the capability information may also be carried in one or more of RRC signaling, MAC CE signaling or UCI signaling.
  • the above-mentioned one or more fields may be fields defined in RRC signaling, fields defined in MAC CE signaling, or fields defined in UCI signaling, or may be newly defined RRC fields, MAC CE fields, or UCI fields. Therefore, the embodiments of the present application are not limited. Of course, capability information can also be carried in newly defined signaling.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation of the capability information, and the capability information may directly indicate whether the terminal device supports the cross-slot transmission mode.
  • the first indication information and the capability information may be carried in different signaling, or in different fields of the same signaling.
  • the capability information can indirectly indicate whether the terminal device supports the transmission mode across time slots. For example, whether the terminal device supports the transmission mode across time slots can be indicated by indicating whether the field of bearer capability information exists. If the field of bearing capability information exists, it may indicate that the terminal device does not support the cross-slot transmission mode; correspondingly, if the field of bearer capability information does not exist, it may indicate that the terminal device supports the cross-slot transmission mode.
  • the second determination mode the terminal device determines the target transmission mode according to a predetermined rule (also referred to as a preset rule).
  • the preset rule may be that the low-complexity terminal device uses the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, the third transmission mode, or the fourth transmission mode to send the uplink channel.
  • the preset rule may be to determine the target transmission mode according to the capability information of the low-complexity terminal device.
  • S2002 is an optional step, which is illustrated by a dotted line in FIG. 20 .
  • the network device may also receive the uplink channel from the terminal device according to the pre-rule. For example, if the network device determines to receive the uplink channel from the low-complexity terminal device, then the network device receives the uplink channel from the low-complexity terminal device in the target transmission mode corresponding to the preset rule. If the preset rule is to determine the target transmission mode according to the capability information of the low-complexity terminal device. Then, the network device can determine the target transmission mode according to the capability information reported by the low-complexity terminal device, so as to receive the uplink channel from the low-complexity terminal device in the target transmission mode.
  • the terminal device sends the uplink channel according to the determined target transmission mode, and correspondingly, the network device receives the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device determines the target transmission mode used for sending the uplink channel, and sends the uplink channel in the target transmission mode.
  • the network device receives the uplink channel from the terminal device in the target transmission mode.
  • the low-complexity terminal device determines to use the first transmission mode to send the uplink channel. Since in the first transmission mode, the interval between the first hop and the second hop of any uplink channel is, for example, 14 ⁇ n symbols, so even if the low-complexity terminal device sends the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, Frequency tuning is also possible within 14xn symbols. In this way, the impact on the transmission of the uplink channel can be reduced, and the transmission performance of the uplink channel of the low-complexity terminal equipment can be avoided as much as possible.
  • the low-complexity terminal equipment can determine the number of the starting symbol of the second hop of the PUCCH and the normal terminal equipment adopts the frequency hopping transmission in the time slot.
  • the numbers of the start symbols of the second hop when the PUCCH is sent in the same way are the same.
  • network devices can uniformly configure common PUCCH resources (formats) through system messages, and there is no need to configure separate PUCCH formats for low-complexity terminal devices, which can reduce signaling overhead and resource overhead. For example, using the current PUCCH format to configure PUCCH resources for terminal equipment, the position of candidate PUCCH symbols in each time slot remains unchanged, which can reduce the resources used for sending PUCCH, and will not occupy resources allocated for other terminal equipment.
  • the low-complexity terminal device determines to use the second transmission mode to send the uplink channel.
  • the second transmission mode there are X symbols between the first hop and the second hop of any uplink channel, so even if the low-complexity terminal device sends the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold, it can Frequency tuning within X symbols. In this way, the impact on the transmission of the uplink channel can be reduced, and the transmission performance of the uplink channel of the low-complexity terminal equipment can be avoided as much as possible.
  • X may be less than 14, that is, the first hop of the upstream channel and the second hop of the upstream channel may be located in the same time slot. In this way, the delay in sending the uplink channel can be reduced.
  • the low-complexity terminal device determines to use the third transmission mode to send the uplink channel. Because in the third transmission mode, the relationship between the end symbol number S1 of the first hop of the uplink channel and the number S2 of the start symbol of the second hop of the uplink channel is specified. It is equivalent to indirectly indicating that there is a certain number of symbols between the first hop and the second hop of the uplink channel.
  • S2 can be selected from multiple sets, such as [S1+L1, S1-L1], [S1+L1, S1], [S1, S1-L1], or [S1, S1+L1, S1-L1], more flexible.
  • the low-complexity terminal device determines to use the fourth transmission mode to send the uplink channel, and specifies that the low-complexity terminal device that does not support the frequency hopping transmission mode in the time slot sends the uplink channel within the range exceeding the first bandwidth threshold. How? Repeat the way of sending the uplink channel.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of the time-frequency resources for transmitting the uplink channel by the low-complexity terminal device 1 .
  • the first transmission mode, the second transmission mode, and the third transmission mode provided by the embodiments of the present application can flexibly determine X, and no matter whether the number of symbols of the uplink channel is odd or even, it can make the low-complexity terminal equipment and the Normal terminal equipment reuses time-frequency resources better, avoiding partial overlap of symbols sent between different terminal equipment, thereby avoiding interference between terminal equipment.
  • the time-frequency resources of different terminal devices may be the same, and the signals of different terminal devices may be distinguished by means of code division multiplexing.
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • the modulated data signal needs to be multiplied by a specific orthogonal sequence, and different terminal devices use different orthogonal sequences.
  • Orthogonal transmission can be implemented, so the same time-frequency resources can be used, and signals of different terminal devices can be distinguished in the code domain.
  • the premise of orthogonal transmission is that the OFDM symbols where the data signals of different terminal devices are located must be the same.
  • the OFDM symbol where the data signal of one terminal device is located is the same as the OFDM symbol where the demodulation reference signal (DM-RS) of another UE is located, since the data signal and the demodulation reference signal are obviously not sent orthogonally, Then the signals of different DM-RS's will interfere, which will affect the channel estimation and demodulation performance of the uplink channel, thereby affecting the uplink performance of the DM-RS's.
  • DM-RS demodulation reference signal
  • Terminal Device 1 and Terminal Device 2 may both be low-complexity terminal devices. It is also possible that terminal device 1 is a low-complexity terminal device and terminal device 2 is a normal terminal device. Alternatively, terminal device 1 is a normal terminal device, and terminal device 2 is a low-complexity terminal device.
  • the number of OFDM symbols used for sending DM-RS in the OFDM symbols of the first hop of PUCCH and the number of OFDM symbols used to send DM-RS in the OFDM symbols of the second hop of PUCCH The number of OFDM symbols is different.
  • the number of OFDM symbols used for transmitting data in the OFDM symbols of the first hop of the PUCCH is different from the number of OFDM symbols used to transmit data in the OFDM symbols of the second hop of the PUCCH.
  • the number of symbols of the PUCCH is equal to 6, 10 or 14. That is, when L satisfies L/2 is an odd number.
  • the first OFDM symbol number of the L symbols transmitted by the PUCCH is 0, and the subsequent numbers are sequentially incremented by 1.
  • the even-numbered OFDM symbols carry DM-RS signals, that is, such OFDM symbols are DM-RS OFDM symbols, and other OFDM symbols are symbols that carry data signals, that is, data OFDM symbols.
  • the relative symbol positions of the OFDM symbols used to transmit DM-RS and the OFDM symbols used to transmit data in the first hop and the relative symbol positions in the second hop are different, and may be just staggered, as shown in FIG. 23 .
  • the OFDM symbols where the data signals of different terminal devices are located are different, and terminal device 1 On the contrary, the OFDM symbol where the data signal of the terminal device 2 is located is the same as the OFDM symbol where the DM-RS of the terminal device 2 is located, which will increase the interference between the terminal devices and affect the uplink performance of the terminal device.
  • the cross-slot frequency hopping transmission mode provided in the embodiment of the present application, it can be ensured that the first hop OFDM symbol sent by the terminal device 1 and the first hop OFDM symbol sent by the terminal device 2 use the same time-frequency resources, or the terminal
  • the time-frequency resources used by the second-hop OFDM symbols sent by the device 1 and the second-hop OFDM symbols sent by the terminal device 2 are the same. Therefore, when the time-frequency resources of different terminal devices are the same, the signals of different terminal devices can be distinguished by means of code division multiplexing, which can also reduce the interference between the terminal devices and minimize the impact on the uplink performance of the terminal devices. .
  • multiple low-complexity terminal devices share PUCCH resources. Take the low-complexity terminal device 1, the low-complexity terminal device 2, and the low-complexity terminal device 3 share the PUCCH resource as an example.
  • the network equipment pre-configures the low-complexity terminal equipment 1, the low-complexity terminal equipment 2, and the low-complexity terminal equipment 3 whose uplink channels have start symbols in the time slots, which are all S1. If the network device schedules the low-complexity terminal device 1 and the low-complexity terminal device 3 to send the first-hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel in time slot m, and send the second-hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel in time slot m+1. As shown in FIG.
  • the network device in order to avoid overlapping time-frequency resources of uplink channels of different terminal devices, the network device cannot schedule the low-complexity terminal device 2 to transmit the first-hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel in time slot m+1. Therefore, the low-complexity terminal device 2 can only be scheduled in a later time slot, which increases the delay of the low-complexity terminal device 2 .
  • the scheduling delay of the low-complexity terminal device 2 can be reduced.
  • the network device schedules the low-complexity terminal device 1 and the low-complexity terminal device 3 to send the first-hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel in the time slot m,
  • the time slot m+1 transmits the second hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel.
  • the network device can still schedule the low-complexity terminal device 2 to send the first-hop OFDM symbol of the uplink channel in the time slot m+1, so the scheduling delay of the low-complexity terminal device 2 can be reduced.
  • the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are respectively introduced from the perspective of interaction between a terminal device and a network device.
  • the steps performed by the network device may also be implemented separately by different communication apparatuses.
  • the first device is configured to determine a target transmission mode from multiple transmission modes
  • the second device is configured to receive the uplink channel in the target transmission mode, that is to say, the first device and the second device jointly complete the steps in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the steps performed by the network device are not limited to a specific division manner in this application.
  • the steps performed by the above-mentioned network devices may be respectively It is implemented by DU, CU and RU.
  • the terminal device and the network device may include hardware structures and/or software modules, and implement the above functions in the form of hardware structures, software modules, or hardware structures plus software modules . Whether one of the above functions is performed in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication device.
  • the following describes a communication device used to implement the above method in the embodiments of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of a communication apparatus 2600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 2600 may include a processing module 2610 and a transceiver module 2620.
  • a storage unit may also be included, and the storage unit may be used to store instructions (codes or programs) and/or data.
  • the processing module 2610 and the transceiver module 2620 may be coupled with the storage unit, for example, the processing module 2610 may read instructions (codes or programs) and/or data in the storage unit to implement corresponding methods.
  • the above-mentioned units may be set independently, or may be partially or fully integrated.
  • the communication apparatus 2600 can correspondingly implement the behaviors and functions of the terminal equipment in the foregoing method embodiments, for example, implement the method performed by the terminal equipment in the embodiment of FIG. 20 .
  • the communication apparatus 2600 may be a terminal device, or a component (such as a chip or circuit) applied in the terminal device, or a chip or a chipset in the terminal device or a part of the chip for performing related method functions.
  • the transceiver module 2620 can be used to perform all receiving or sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, such as S2002, S2003, and S2004 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, and/or to support this document other procedures of the described techniques.
  • the processing module 2610 is used to perform all the operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20 except for sending and receiving operations, such as S2001 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20 , and/or for supporting Other procedures for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication apparatus 2600 can correspondingly implement the behaviors and functions of the network device in the above method embodiments, for example, implement the method executed by the network device in the embodiment of FIG. 20 .
  • the communication apparatus 2600 may be a network device, or a component (such as a chip or circuit) applied in the network device, or a chip or a chipset in the network device or a part of the chip for performing related method functions.
  • the transceiver module 2620 can be used to perform all the receiving or sending operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, such as S2002, S2003, and S2004 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, and/or to support this document other procedures of the described techniques.
  • the processing module 2610 is configured to perform all operations performed by the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20 except for the transceiving operations, and/or to support other processes of the techniques described herein.
  • processing module 2610 in this embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component
  • transceiver module 2620 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component or a communication interface.
  • FIG. 27 shows a communication apparatus 2700 provided by an embodiment of the present application, where the communication apparatus 2700 may be a terminal device capable of implementing the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, or the communication apparatus 2700 may be a network device , can implement the functions of the network equipment in the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application; the communication apparatus 2700 may also be a device that can support the terminal equipment to implement the corresponding functions in the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application, or can support the network equipment to implement the implementation of the present application. Examples provide means of corresponding functions in the method.
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may be a chip system. In this embodiment of the present application, the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver module 2620 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver is integrated in the communication device 2700 to form a communication interface 2710 .
  • the communication apparatus 2700 includes at least one processor 2720, which is configured to implement or support the communication apparatus 2700 to implement the functions of the network equipment (base station) or terminal equipment in the methods provided in the embodiments of this application. For details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, which is not repeated here.
  • Communication apparatus 2700 may also include at least one memory 2730 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • Memory 2730 and processor 2720 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 2720 may cooperate with the memory 2730.
  • the processor 2720 may execute program instructions and/or data stored in the memory 2730 to cause the communication device 2700 to implement the corresponding method.
  • At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor. It should be noted that the memory 2730 is not necessary, so it is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 27 .
  • the communication apparatus 2700 may also include a communication interface 2710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the devices used in the communication apparatus 2700 may communicate with other devices.
  • a communication interface 2710 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the devices used in the communication apparatus 2700 may communicate with other devices.
  • the communication device is a terminal
  • the other device is a network device; or, when the communication device is a network device, the other device is a terminal.
  • the processor 2720 may utilize the communication interface 2710 to send and receive data.
  • the communication interface 2710 may specifically be a transceiver.
  • the specific connection medium between the communication interface 2710 , the processor 2720 , and the memory 2730 is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the memory 2730, the processor 2720, and the communication interface 2710 are connected through a bus 2740 in FIG. 27.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 27.
  • the connection between other components is only for schematic illustration. , is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is shown in FIG. 27, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 2720 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, which can implement Alternatively, each method, step, and logic block diagram disclosed in the embodiments of the present application are executed.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 2730 may be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk drive (HDD) or a solid-state drive (SSD), etc., or a volatile memory (volatile memory), Such as random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM).
  • Memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the communication device in the above-mentioned embodiment may be a terminal or a circuit, or may be a chip applied in the terminal or other combined devices or components having the above-mentioned terminal function.
  • the transceiver module may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module may be a processor, such as a central processing unit (CPU).
  • the transceiver module may be a radio frequency unit
  • the processing module may be a processor.
  • the transceiver module may be an input/output interface of the system-on-chip, and the processing module may be a processor of the system-on-chip.
  • FIG. 28 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified communication device.
  • the communication device is a base station as an example.
  • the base station may be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 , and may be the network device in FIG. 1 , and execute the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 2800 may include a transceiver 2810 , a memory 2821 and a processor 2822 .
  • the transceiver 2810 may be used for communication by a communication device, for example, for sending or receiving the above-mentioned first indication information, or capability information.
  • the memory 2821 is coupled to the processor 2822, and can be used to store programs and data necessary for the communication device 2800 to implement various functions.
  • the processor 2822 is configured to support the communication device 2800 to perform the corresponding functions in the above-mentioned methods, and the functions can be implemented by calling the programs stored in the memory 2821 .
  • the transceiver 2810 may be a wireless transceiver, which may be used to support the communication device 2800 to receive and send signaling and/or data through a wireless air interface.
  • the transceiver 2810 may also be referred to as a transceiver unit or a communication unit, and the transceiver 2810 may include one or more radio frequency units 2812 and one or more antennas 2811, wherein the radio frequency unit is such as a remote radio uLit (RRU) Or an active antenna unit (active aLteLLa uLit, AAU), which can be specifically used for the transmission of radio frequency signals and the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and the one or more antennas can be used for radiation and reception of radio frequency signals.
  • the transceiver 2810 may only include the above radio frequency unit, and then the communication device 2800 may include the transceiver 2810 , the memory 2821 , the processor 2822 and the antenna 2811 .
  • the memory 2821 and the processor 2822 can be integrated or independent from each other. As shown in FIG. 28 , the memory 2821 and the processor 2822 can be integrated into the control unit 2820 of the communication device 2800 .
  • the control unit 2820 may include a baseband unit (basebaLd uLit, BBU) of an LTE base station, and the baseband unit may also be referred to as a digital unit (digital uLit, DU), or the control unit 2820 may include 5G and future wireless access.
  • Distributed unit distributed uLit, DU
  • centralized unit ceLtralized uLit, CU
  • the above-mentioned control unit 2820 can be composed of one or more antenna panels, wherein, multiple antenna panels can jointly support a wireless access network (such as an LTE network) of a single access mode, and multiple antenna panels can also support different access modes. Radio access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the memory 2821 and processor 2822 may serve one or more antenna panels. That is, the memory 2821 and the processor 2822 may be separately provided on each antenna panel. It is also possible that multiple antenna panels share the same memory 2821 and processor 2822 .
  • necessary circuits may be provided on each antenna panel, for example, the circuits may be used to realize the coupling between the memory 2821 and the processor 2822 .
  • the above transceiver 2810, processor 2822 and memory 2821 can be connected through a bus structure and/or other connection media.
  • the processor 2822 can perform baseband processing on the data to be sent, and output the baseband signal to the radio frequency unit.
  • the radio frequency unit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna. It is sent in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency unit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 2822, and the processor 2822 converts the baseband signal into data and transmits the data to the data. to be processed.
  • the transceiver 2810 can be used to perform the above steps performed by the transceiver module 2620 .
  • processor 2822 may be used to invoke instructions in memory 2821 to perform the steps performed by processing module 2610 above.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic structural diagram of a simplified terminal device.
  • the terminal device takes a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the vehicle-mounted unit, execute software programs, and process data of software programs.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of the baseband signal and the radio frequency signal and the processing of the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of equipment may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 29 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 29 . In an actual device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device or the like.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and the radio frequency circuit with a transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit of the apparatus, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit of the apparatus.
  • the apparatus includes a transceiver unit 2910 and a processing unit 2920 .
  • the transceiver unit 2910 may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, or the like.
  • the processing unit 2920 may also be referred to as a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and the like.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 2910 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 2910 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 2910 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit 2910 may also be sometimes referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit or the like.
  • the receiving unit may also sometimes be referred to as a receiver, receiver, or receiving circuit, or the like.
  • the transmitting unit may also sometimes be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, or the like.
  • transceiving unit 2910 is configured to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the above method embodiments
  • processing unit 2920 is configured to perform other operations on the terminal except the transceiving operations in the above method embodiments.
  • the transceiver unit 2910 may be configured to perform S2002, S2003, S2004 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, and/or other processes for supporting the techniques described herein.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit may be an integrated processor, a microprocessor or an integrated circuit.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, specifically, the communication system includes a network device and a terminal device, or may further include more network devices and multiple terminal devices.
  • the communication system includes a network device and a terminal device for implementing the above-mentioned related functions in FIG. 20 .
  • the network devices are respectively used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned network parts in FIG. 20 .
  • the terminal device is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device related to FIG. 20 .
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which, when running on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the network device in FIG. 20; or when running on the computer, cause the computer to execute the method The method performed by the terminal device in FIG. 20 .
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which includes instructions, which, when running on a computer, cause the computer to execute the method executed by the network device in FIG. 20 ; or when running on the computer, cause the computer to execute the method shown in FIG. 20 .
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, which includes a processor and may also include a memory, for implementing the functions of the network device or terminal in the foregoing method; or for implementing the functions of the network device and the terminal in the foregoing method.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • At least one (a) of a, b or c can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • the ordinal numbers such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, sequence, priority or priority of multiple objects. Importance.
  • the first non-frequency hopping transmission mode and the second non-frequency hopping transmission mode are only for distinguishing different non-frequency hopping transmission modes, and do not indicate the priority or importance of the two non-frequency hopping transmission modes. different.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the sequence of execution, and the execution sequence of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be dealt with in the embodiments of the present application. implementation constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence, or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置，该方法包括：确定目标传输方式，并以目标传输方式发送上行信道。目标传输方式为第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式中的一种。第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式中，在第m个时间单元内发送上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送上行信道的第二跳。用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔一定数量的符号。这样即使低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，也可以在一定数量符号内进行频率调谐。这样可降低对上行信道的发送影响，尽量避免低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。

Description

一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请要求在2021年04月09日提交中华人民共和国知识产权局、申请号为202110385406.6、申请名称为“一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置。
背景技术
通常来说，终端设备在不超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行信息接收或信息发送时，不需要频率调谐。但是，如果终端设备在超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围进行信息接收或信息发送，终端设备需要频率调谐以在更大的频率范围内进行信息接收或信息发送。
对于低复杂度终端设备，例如海量机器类通信(massive machine type communications，mMTC)设备来说，因为低复杂度终端设备的带宽能力有限，低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围进行上行信息的发送时，低复杂度终端设备需要M个符号的时间进行频率调谐。因此上行信息的传输不能在这M个符号的调谐时间上进行发送，这会导致低复杂度终端设备的发送上行信息的性能下降。
发明内容
本申请提供一种PUCCH的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置，以减少低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH传输的性能下降。
第一方面，提供了一种PUCCH的发送方法，该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
确定目标传输方式，并以目标传输方式发送上行信道。目标传输方式为本申请实施例提供的第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式中的一种。
第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳。其中，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X等于P×n，P为时间单元包括的符号个数，n、m和h为正整数。应理解，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道。
本申请实施例提供的第一传输方式，由于任意一个上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有例如14×n个符号，这样即使低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，也可以在14×n个符号内进行频率调谐。这样可降低对上行信道的发送影响，尽量避免低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。而且任意一个上行信道，例如 PUCCH的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔14×n个符号，低复杂度终端设备可确定PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号与正常终端设备采用时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH时的第二跳的起始符号的编号相同。这样网络设备可通过系统消息统一配置公共PUCCH资源(格式)，无需单独为低复杂度终端设备配置单独的PUCCH格式，可减少信令开销和资源开销。例如沿用目前PUCCH格式为终端设备配置PUCCH资源，那么每个时隙的候选PUCCH符号位置仍然不变，可减少用于发送PUCCH的资源，也不会占用为其他终端设备分配的资源。
第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳。其中，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，m为正整数，h为0或正整数。X与L和N相关，和/或，X与子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing，SCS)相关。L为所述上行信道的符号个数，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数。应理解，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道。
本申请实施例提供的第二传输方式，与第一传输方式类似，任意一个上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有X个符号，这样即使低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，也可以在X个符号内进行频率调谐。这样可降低对上行信道的发送影响，尽量避免低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。另外，X可以小于14，也就是上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳可位于同一个时隙内。这样可降低发送上行信道的时延。
第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳，m和h为正整数。用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。L1个符号中的第一个符号在第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，L2个符号中的第一个符号在第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2。S2为第一集合中的元素，第一集合为如下任一集合：
[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000001
L2＝L-L1，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000002
表示向下取整，L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
本申请实施例提供的第三传输方式，规定了上行信道的第一跳的结束符号编号S1和上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号S2之间的关系。相当于，间接指示了上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有一定数量的符号。本申请实施例提供了S2的三种候选值，例如S1、S1+L1和S1-L1。终端设备可在这三种候选值中任意组成的集合，例如[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]中选择一个集合，并在选择的集合中选择一个元素作为S2的目标值，更为灵活。
在一种可能的实现方式中，X与SCS大小相关，本申请实施例根据要发送的上行信道对应的SCS确定X的取值，更为灵活。可能有如下三种情况：
情况一，在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，X等于P。应理解，第一门限可根据终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时长来确定。如果SCS较小，那么低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时间较短。这种情况下，X可等于P，以尽量降低发送上行信道的时延，节约资源开销。
情况二，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于第一门限的情况下，X大于或等于 2×P。如果SCS较小，那么低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时间较长。这种情况下，X可等于2×P，以尽量为低复杂终端设备留有足够的时间用于频率调谐，从而尽量保证发送上行信道的性能。
情况三，或者，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于第一门限的情况下，所述上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送所述上行信道的最小符号个数，X等于P。作为情况二的一种可替换的方案，在低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时间较长的情况下，虽然X＝2×P，可为终端设备留有足够时间进行频率调谐，但是也带来了额外的发送时延。因此，情况三中，仍然设置X等于P，但是可限定上行信道的符号个数，以尽量保证以低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占PUCCH的中符号个数的比例较小。从而尽量保证低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH的可靠性。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第二传输方式，X与L和N相关，本申请实施例根据L和N来确定X的取值，更为灵活。可能有如下三种情况。
情况一，在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，X＝N或所述X大于N。其中，P为时间单元包括的符号个数。应理解，如果L和N总和小于或等于P，那么只需要为低复杂度终端设备留有N个符号用于频率调谐即可，既能够保证低复杂度终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，尽量避免影响终端设备发送PUCCH的性能。
情况二，在L+N大于P的情况下，X大于或等于P×n，n为正整数。其中，P为时间单元包括的符号个数。应理解，如果L和N总和大于14，要么终端设备进行频率调谐所需的时长较长，要么上行信道的符号个数L较多。为了保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，本申请实施例可设置X＝14×n。
情况三，在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数。其中，P为时间单元包括的符号个数。应理解，如果L和N总和大于14×s，且小于14×(s+1)。为了给终端设备留有足够的时间进行频率调谐，可确定X大于或等于14×s。同理，X＝14×s的实现具体以及有益效果可参见前述第一传输方式中相关内容的介绍，这里不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第三传输方式，h＝1。本申请实施例提供了S2的三种候选值，例如S1、S1+L1和S1-L1。终端设备可在这三种候选值中任意组成的集合，例如[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]中选择一个集合，并在选择的集合中选择一个元素作为S2的目标值，更为灵活。可能包括如下三种情况。
情况一，在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素。也就是，L和N总和小于或等于P。这种情况下，那么只需要为终端设备留有N个符号用于频率调谐即可，既能够保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，减少对终端设备发送PUCCH的性能的影响。因此，本申请实施例可从[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]选择一个元素作为S2，即S2＝S1，或者，S2＝S1+L1，或者S2＝S1-L1。
情况二，在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素。也就是，L1与N之和大于P，且L和N总和小于P。这种情况下，优先保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，减少对终端设备发送上行信道的性能的影响。因此，本申请实施例可从[S1+L1，S1]选择一个元素作为S2。即S2＝S1或S2＝S1+L1。
情况三，在P-L1小于N的情况下，S2＝S1+L1。应理解，P-L1小于N，也就是L1与N之和大于P。这种情况下，可认为要么终端设备进行频率调谐所需的时长较长，要么上 行信道的符号个数L较多。为了保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，本申请实施例可确定S2＝S1。即上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14×P个符号。
在一种可能的实现方式中，确定目标传输方式，包括：从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括非跳频传输方式、时间单元内跳频传输方式，以及时间单元间跳频传输方式中的一种或多种；
非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
时间单元间跳频传输方式为：重复E次发送上行信道，在第m个时间单元内进行重复E次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道A，在第m+h个时间单元内进行重复E次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道B。上行信道B承载的信息是上行信道A承载的信息的重复。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道A的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道B的起始符号的编号相同。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道A的符号个数与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道B的符号个数相同。用于发送上行信道A的频域资源和用于发送上行信道B的频域资源不同，m和h为正整数。
应理解，本申请实施例提供了上行信道新的三种传输方式，兼容目前的传输方式，终端设备在发送上行信道之前，可确定使用哪种传输方式。
在一种可能的实现方式中，从多种传输方式确定目标传输方式，包括：基于预设规则从所述多种传输方式确定目标传输方式，所述预设规则为：终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式为第一传输方式，或第二传输方式，或第三传输方式。该方案提供了确定目标传输方式的一种方式，例如根据预设规则从多种传输方式中确定目标传输方式，无需信令交互，节省信令开销。当然，终端设备确定目标传输方式也可以是网络设备预配置或者协议预定义，或者网络设备通过动态信令指示的，简单直接，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备重复R次发送上行信道，R为大于或等于2的正整数，R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在R次重复发送中，用于第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的最后一个符号，与用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的第一个符号之间间隔Q个符号，上行信道W承载的信息是上行信道U承载的信息的重复，所述预设规则还包括：
在Q大于或等于N的情况下，用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送上行信道W的第二跳的频域资源不同。
在Q小于N的情况下，用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送上行信道W的第二跳的频域资源相同。
应理解，低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道时，可采用第一传输方式或第二传输方式或第三传输方式发送上行信道。由于第一传输方式或第二传输方式或第三传输方式均为跨时隙跳频传输方式，相邻两次发送中，如果Q个符号足够低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐。这种情况下，低复杂度终端设备从第i次的上行信道的第二跳到第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳，显然没有必要进行跳频，以降低发送上行信道的时延。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为第一频域位置，在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的 第二跳的频域资源的起始位置为第二频域资源，其中，第一频域位置和/或第二频域位置是根据来自网络设备的指示信息确定的，所述指示信息用于指示预配置的用于发送上行信道W的第一跳的起始频域位置为所述第二频域位置，以及用于指示预配置的用于发送上行信道W的第二跳的起始频域位置为所述第一频域位置。
该方案中，为了使得低复杂度终端设备与正常终端设备更好地共享上行信道资源。低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备可占用相同的时域资源，占用不同的频域资源发送上行信道，从而可节约资源开销。网络设备调度低复杂度终端设备在各个时隙上发送上行信道的第一跳和第二跳的起始频域位置与正常终端设备在各个时隙上发送上行信道的第一跳和第二跳的起始频域位置不同。尤其，在正常终端设备重复发送上行信道的情况下，由于低复杂度终端设备采用跨时隙传输方式能够使得低复杂度终端设备的上行信道的第二跳延后发送，所以仍然可以使用已经配置好的公共上行信道资源，不需要单独为低复杂终端设备另外配置上行信道资源，从而进一步节约资源开销和信令开销。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：向网络设备发送能力信息，该能力信息用于指示是否支持第一传输方式、第二传输方式以及第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。该方案中，网络设备可根据终端设备上报的能力信息来指示终端设备采用的传输方式，以保证终端设备配置或指示的上行信道的传输方式与终端设备的实际能力匹配。
与第一方面对应，第二方面，提供了一种PUCCH的接收方法，该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
生成第一指示信息，并向终端设备发送所述第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示多种传输方式中的目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式，以及第三传输方式中的至少一种。
第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳。其中，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X等于P×n，P为时间单元包括的符号个数，n、m和h为正整数。应理解，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道。
第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳。其中，用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，m为正整数，h为0或正整数。用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。X与L和N相关，和/或，X与子载波间隔(subcarrier spacing，SCS)相关。L为所述上行信道的符号个数，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数。应理解，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道。
第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳，m和h为正整数。用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同。L1个符号中的第一个符号在第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，L2个符号中的第一个符号在第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2。S2为第一集合中的元素，第一集合为如下任一集合：
[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000003
L2＝L-L1，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000004
表示向下取整，L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，X等于P；
在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于第一门限的情况下，X大于或等于P的2倍；或者，在上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送上行信道的最小符号个数，X等于所述P。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第二传输方式，X满足如下的一种或多种：
在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，X＝N或X大于N；
在L+N大于P的情况下，X大于或等于P×n，n为正整数；或者，在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数；其中，P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第三传输方式，h＝1，S2满足：
在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素；
在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素；
在P-L1小于N的情况下，S2＝S1+L1。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示是否支持所述第一传输方式、所述第二传输方式以及所述第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。
关于第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可以参考对第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第三方面，提供了另一种PUCCH的发送方法，该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为终端设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
终端设备确定目标传输方式，并以目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道，该目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的消息3物理上行共享信道Msg3 PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了所述终端设备竞争解决标识的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息的物理上行控制信道PUCCH；
其中，R为大于或等于2的正整数，R次重复发送中每次发送的上行信道承载的信息都相同，第四传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U。上行信道U承载的信息是上行信道W承载的信息的重复。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的符号个数分别与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的符号个数相同。用于发送上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送上行信道U的频域资源不同，m和h为正整数。
本申请实施例针对网络设备为终端设备配置以时隙内跳频传输方式重复R次发送3种上行信道的场景，规定了不支持时隙内跳频传输方式的低复杂度终端设备，在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，如何重复发送上行信道的方式。例如可重复2R次发送上行信道，相邻两次之间以跳频方式发送，且由于相邻两次之间也间隔一定数量的符号，所 以可减少由于进行频率调谐导致的上行信道传输性能的下降。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备确定目标传输方式，包括：从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括：非跳频传输方式和时间单元内跳频传输方式中的一种或多种。所述非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送所述上行信道。所述时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送所述上行信道。
本申请实施例提供了上行信道一种新的传输方式，即第四传输方式，而非跳频传输方式和时间单元内跳频传输方式可认为是现有的两种上行信道的传输方式。为了兼容现有的上行信道的传输方式，可在现有的两种上行信道的传输方式并结合本申请实施例提供的第四传输方式中选择一种传输方式作为目标传输方式。
在一种可能的实现方式中，从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，包括：
基于预设规则从所述多种传输方式确定所述目标传输方式；
其中，所述预设规则包括：所述终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送所述上行信道，所述目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式；或者，所述预设规则包括：所述终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送所述上行信道，且N/L大于或等于预设门限时，所述目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式；
其中，所述N为所述终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数，所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
本申请实施例提供了确定目标传输方式的方法。可根据预先规定的规则从多种传输方式中确定目标传输方式，无需信令交互，节省信令开销。当然，终端设备确定目标传输方式也可以是网络设备预配置或者协议预定义，或者网络设备通过动态信令指示的，简单直接，本申请实施例对此不作限制。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备确定目标传输方式，包括：
所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示重复次数E，所述R和所述E满足如下关系：
如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，所述R等于所述E；如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔小于所述N，所述R等于所述E的2倍；其中，所述N为所述终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数。
考虑到网络设备可能会配置终端设备重复E次发送上行信道。对于低复杂终端设备来说，如果在相邻两次重复发送PUCCH，第i次发送上行信道W的结束符号和第i+1次发送上行信道U的起始符号之间间隔的符号数小于低复杂度终端设备执行频率调谐所需时长对应的符号数。这样的话，低复杂度终端设备需要丢弃上行信道W和/或上行信道U的部分符号。为了尽量减少丢弃的符号，本申请实施例可重复2E次发送上行信道。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述Msg3 PUSCH为：用于调度所述Msg3 PUSCH的下行控制信息DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
与第三方面对应，第四方面，提供了另一种PUCCH的接收方法，该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的 通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。下面以所述通信设备为网络设备为例进行描述。该方法包括：
生成第三指示信息，并向终端设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示所述终端设备以目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道，该目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的Msg3 PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了所述终端设备竞争解决标识的PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息的PUCCH；
其中，R为大于或等于2的正整数，第四传输方式为：R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U。上行信道U承载的信息是上行信道W承载的信息的重复。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的符号个数分别与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的符号个数相同。用于发送上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送上行信道U的频域资源不同，m和h为正整数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述Msg3 PUSCH为：用于调度所述Msg3 PUSCH的下行控制信息DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
关于第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可以参考对第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是终端侧通信设备或能够支持终端侧通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。该通信装置可包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，所述处理模块用于确定目标传输方式，收发模块用于以所述目标传输方式发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式为第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式。
其中，第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，第一跳和第二跳属于同一个上行信道。其中，用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X等于P×n，P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同，n为正整数，m和h为正整数；
第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，第一跳和第二跳属于同一个上行信道。其中，用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号。用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同，m为正整数，h为0或正整数。X与L和N相关，和/或，X与子载波间隔SCS相关；L为所述上行信道的符号个数，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数；
第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳。用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同。L1个符号中的第一个符号在第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，L2个符号中的第一个符号在第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2，m和h为正整数，S2为第一集合中的元素，所述第一集合为如下任一集合：
[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000005
L2＝L-L1，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000006
表示向下取整，所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，X等于P；
在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于第一门限的情况下，X大于或等于P的2倍；或者，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送所述上行信道的最小符号个数，X等于P。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第二传输方式，X满足如下的一种或多种：
在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，X＝N或X大于N；
在L+N大于P的情况下，X大于或等于P×n，n为正整数；或者，在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数；其中，P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第三传输方式，h＝1，S2满足：
在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素；
在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素；
在P-L1小于N的情况下，S2＝S1+L1。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括非跳频传输方式、时间单元内跳频传输方式，以及时间单元间跳频传输方式中的一种或多种；
非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
时间单元间跳频传输方式为：重复E次发送上行信道，在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复E次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道A，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道B，上行信道B承载的信息是上行信道A承载的信息的重复，在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道A的起始符号和符号个数与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道B的起始符号和符号个数相同，用于发送上行信道A的频域资源和用于发送上行信道B的频域资源不同，所述m和所述h为正整数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：基于预设规则从所述多种传输方式确定所述目标传输方式，所述预设规则为：终端设备在超过所述第一带宽阈值的范围内发送所述上行信道，所述目标传输方式为第一传输方式，或第二传输方式，或第三传输方式。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道的第一跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为第一频域位置，在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道第二跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为第二频域资源，其中，第一频域位置和/或第二频域位置是根据来自网络设备的指示信息确定的，所述指示信息用于指示预配置的用于发送所述上行信道的第一跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为所述第二频域位置，以及用于指示预配置的用于发送所述上行信道的第二跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为所述第一频域位置。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备重复R次发送上行信道，R为大于或等于2的正整数，R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在R次重复发送中，用于第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的最后一个符号，与用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的 第一跳的第一个符号之间间隔Q个符号，上行信道W承载的信息是上行信道U承载的信息的重复；
在Q大于或等于N的情况下，用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的频域资源不同。
在Q小于N的情况下，用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的频域资源相同。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发模块还用于：
向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示是否支持所述第一传输方式、所述第二传输方式以及所述第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是网络侧通信设备或能够支持网络侧通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。该通信装置可包括处理模块和收发模块，其中，所述处理模块用于生成第一指示信息；所述收发模块用于向终端设备发送所述第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示多种传输方式中的目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式，以及第三传输方式中的至少一种。
其中，第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，第一跳和第二跳属于同一个上行信道，其中，用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X等于P×n，P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数，用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同，n为正整数，m和h为正整数；
第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，第一跳和第二跳属于同一个上行信道，其中，用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号。用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同，m为正整数，h为0或正整数。X与L和N相关，和/或，X与子载波间隔SCS相关；L为所述上行信道的符号个数，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数；
第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳。用于发送第一跳的频域资源和用于发送第二跳的频域资源不同。L1个符号中的第一个符号在第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，L2个符号中的第一个符号在第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2，m和h为正整数，S2为第一集合中的元素，所述第一集合为如下任一集合：
[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000007
L2＝L-L1，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000008
表示向下取整，所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，X等于P；
在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于第一门限的情况下，X大于或等于P的2倍；或者，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送所述上行信道的最小符号个数，X等于P。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第二传输方式，X满足如下的一种或多种：
在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，X＝N或X大于N；
在L+N大于P的情况下，X大于或等于P×n，n为正整数；或者，在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数；其中，P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。
在一种可能的实现方式中，目标传输方式为第三传输方式，h＝1，S2满足：
在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素；
在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素；
在P-L1小于N的情况下，S2＝S1+L1。
在一种可能的实现方式中，所述收发模块还用于：
接收来自终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示是否支持第一传输方式、第二传输方式以及第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。
关于第五方面或第六方面或第五方面的各种可能的实施方式或第六方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可以参考对第一方面或第二方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是终端侧通信设备或能够支持终端侧通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。该通信装置可包括处理模块和收发模块。其中，所述处理模块用于确定目标传输方式；所述收发模块用于以目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的Msg3 PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了终端设备竞争解决标识的PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息的PUCCH。
其中，R为大于或等于2的正整数，R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同。第四传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内进行重复R次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U。上行信道U承载的信息是上行信道W承载的信息的重复。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的符号个数与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的符号个数相同。用于发送上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送上行信道U的频域资源不同，m和h为正整数。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括：非跳频传输方式和时间单元内跳频传输方式中的一种或多种。其中，非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送上行信道。时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送上行信道。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：基于预设规则从多种传输方式确定目标传输方式。其中，预设规则包括：在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式。或者，预设规则包括：在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，且N/L大于或等于预设门限时，目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式。其中，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数，L为上行信道的符号个数。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：根据接收的网络设备的指示信息，确定R，其中，所述指示信息用于指示重复次数E，R和E满足如下关系：
如果第i次发送的上行信道W的最后一个符号和第i+1次发送的上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，R等于E。如果第i次发送的上行信道W的最后一个符号 和第i+1次发送的上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔小于N，R等于E的2倍。其中，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数。
在一种可能实现方式中，Msg3 PUSCH为：用于调度Msg3 PUSCH的DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是网络侧通信设备或能够支持网络侧通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片或芯片系统。该通信装置可包括处理模块和收发模块。其中，所述处理模块生成第一指示信息；所述收发模块用于向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于终端设备以目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道。其中，目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的Msg3 PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了终端设备竞争解决标识的PDSCH的HARQ反馈信息的PUCCH。
其中，R为大于或等于2的正整数，R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同。第四传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内进行重复R次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U。上行信道U承载的信息是上行信道W承载的信息的重复。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同。在第m个时间单元内用于发送上行信道W的符号个数与在第m+h个时间单元内用于发送上行信道U的符号个数相同。用于发送上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送上行信道U的频域资源不同，m和h为正整数。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括：非跳频传输方式和时间单元内跳频传输方式中的一种或多种。其中，非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送上行信道。时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送上行信道。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述处理模块具体用于：基于预设规则从多种传输方式确定目标传输方式。其中，预设规则包括：在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式。或者，预设规则包括：在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，且N/L大于或等于预设门限时，目标传输方式为所述第四传输方式。其中，N为终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内跳频时进行频率调谐能够采用的最大符号个数，L为上行信道的符号个数。
在一种可能实现方式中，所述收发模块还用于：向终端设备发送第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示重复次数E，R和E满足如下关系：
如果第i次发送的上行信道W的最后一个符号和第i+1次发送的上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，R等于E。如果第i次发送的上行信道W的最后一个符号和第i+1次发送的上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔小于N，R等于E的2倍。其中，N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的最大符号个数。
在一种可能实现方式中，Msg3 PUSCH为：用于调度Msg3 PUSCH的DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
关于第七方面或第八方面或第七方面的各种可能的实施方式或第八方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可以参考对第五方面或第六方面或第五方面的各种可能的实施方式或第六方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以为上述实施例中第五方面到第八方面中任一方面的通信装置，或者为设置在第五方面到第八方面中任一方面中的通信装置中的芯片或芯片系统。该通信装置包括通信接口以及处理器，可选的，还包括存储器。其中，该存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令或者数据，处理器与存储器、通信接口耦合，当处理器读取所述计算机程序或指令或数据时，使通信装置执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备所执行的方法。
应理解，该通信接口可以是通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现，或者，如果通信装置为设置在网络设备中的芯片，则通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出电路、管脚等，用于输入/输出指令、数据或信号。所述收发器用于该通信装置与其它设备进行通信。示例性地，当该通信装置为终端时，该其它设备为网络设备；或者，当该通信装置为网络设备时，该其它设备为终端。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，还可以包括存储器和/或通信接口，用于实现第一方面到第四方面中任一方面中所述的方法。在一种可能的实现方式中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，用于保存程序指令和/或数据。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，所述通信系统包括第五方面所述的通信装置和第六方面所述的通信装置；或者所述通信系统包括第七方面所述的通信装置和第八方面中的通信装置。
第十二方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当该计算机程序被运行时，实现上述第一方面到第四方面中任一方面中的方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当所述计算机程序代码被运行时，使得上述第一方面到第四方面中任一方面中的方法被执行。
上述第五方面至第十三方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对各个方面或各个方面及其实现方式的有益效果的描述。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例适用的一种网络架构示意图；
图2为跳频信号的一种示意图；
图3为非跳频信号的一种示意图；
图4为inter-slot跳频的一种示意图；
图5为intra-slot跳频的一种示意图；
图6为正常终端设备以时隙内跳频的传输方式重复发送PUCCH的一示意图；
图7为正常终端设备以时隙内跳频的传输方式重复发送PUCCH的另一示意图；
图8为正常终端设备以时隙间跳频传输方式重复发送PUCCH的示意图；
图9为终端设备在不超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内发送PUCCH的示意图；
图10为终端设备在超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内发送PUCCH的示意图；
图11为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第一示意图；
图12为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第二示意图；
图13为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第三示意图；
图14为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第四示意图；
图15为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第五示意图；
图16为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第六示意图；
图17为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第七示意图；
图18为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第八示意图；
图19为本申请实施例中低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源第九示意图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的上行信道发送以及接收方法的流程示意图；
图21为低复杂度终端设备1在配置的PUCCH资源上发送PUCCH的示意图；
图22为两个低复杂度终端设备在配置的PUCCH资源上发送PUCCH的一示意图；
图23为两个低复杂度终端设备在配置的PUCCH资源上发送PUCCH的另一示意图；
图24为现有技术中的三个低复杂度终端设备共享PUCCH资源的示意图；
图25为本申请实施例提供的三个低复杂度终端设备共享PUCCH资源的示意图；
图26为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图；
图27为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一种结构示意图；
图28为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的另一种结构示意图；
图29为本申请实施例提供的另一通信装置的另一种结构示意图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
本申请的实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于第五代(the fifth generation，5G)移动通信系统，例如NR系统，或者应用于长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统中，或者还可以应用于下一代移动通信系统或其他类似的通信系统，具体的不做限制。
请参考图1，为本申请实施例适用的通信系统的一示例性的架构图，该通信系统可包括核心网设备、网络设备和至少一个终端。如图1以至少一个终端是两个终端为例。终端通过无线的方式与网络设备相连，网络设备通过无线或有线方式与核心网设备连接。核心网设备与网络设备可以是独立的不同的物理设备；或者核心网设备的功能与网络设备的逻辑功能集成在同一个物理设备上；又或者部分核心网设备的功能和部分的网络设备的功能集成在同一个物理设备上。需要说明的是，图1只是示意，本申请的实施例对该移动通信系统中包括的核心网设备、网络设备和终端的数量不做限定。在一些实施例中，该通信系统还可以包括其它网络设备，例如无线中继设备、无线回传设备等。
网络设备是终端通过无线方式接入到该移动通信系统中的接入设备，例如包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，例如基站(例如，接入点)。网络设备也可以是指在空口与终端通信的设备，例如其它可能的终端装置；又例如在一种V2X技术中的网络设备为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与网际协议(internet protocol，IP)分组进行相互转换，作为终端与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体，可以与支持V2X应用的 其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以包括长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)系统或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)；或者也可以包括5G NR系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)；或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network，Cloud RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)；或者也可以包括无线保真(wIreless-fIdelity，Wi-Fi)系统中的接入节点等，本申请的实施例对无线网络设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
本申请实施例中，终端(terminal)可以为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端等。网络设备，可以是NR系统中的下一代基站(next Generation node B，gNB)，可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolutional node B，eNB)等。作为示例而非限定，在本申请的实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。而如上介绍的各种终端设备，如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)，都可以认为是车载终端设备，车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit，OBU)。
按照终端设备支持的业务的类型，可将终端分为多个类型的终端。例如，NR REDCAP UE，即低复杂度或低能力(REDuced CAPability,REDCAP)的终端，该类终端可能在支持的带宽、功耗、天线数等方面比其他终端复杂度低一些，如支持的带宽更窄、功耗更低、天线数更少等。该类终端也可以称为(NR light，NRL)终端，即轻量版的终端。相对而言，非低复杂度或非降低能力的终端设备(例如eMBB终端设备)在本申请实施例中可称为正常终端设备，或传统(legacy)终端设备。或者，可认为本申请实施例存在两类终端设备。例如第一类终端设备，即低复杂度终端设备。第二类终端设备，可以是除低复杂度终端设备之外的终端设备。
本申请实施例中的终端设备可以为第一类终端设备或第二类终端设备，或者其他需要进行传输性能增强的终端设备，如NR增强型移动宽带(Enhanced Mobile Broadband，eMBB)终端设备等。第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备之间的区别包括如下至少一项：
1.带宽能力不同。第一类终端设备支持的最大带宽可以大于第二类终端设备支持的最大带宽。例如，第一类终端设备最大可以支持在一个载波上同时使用100MHz频域资源和网络设备进行通信，而第二类终端设备最大可以支持在一个载波上同时使用20MHz或者10MHz或者5MHz频域资源和网络设备进行通信。
2.收发天线个数不同。第一类终端设备的天线配置可以大于第二类终端设备的天线配置。例如，第一类终端设备支持的最小天线配置可以大于第二类终端设备支持的最大天线配置。
3.上行最大发射功率不同。第一类终端设备的上行最大发射功率可以大于第二类终端设备的上行最大发射功率。
4.第一类终端设备与第二类终端设备对应的协议版本不同。例如NR Rel-15、NR Rel-16终端设备可以认为是第一类终端设备，第二类终端设备可以认为是NR Rel-17终端设备。
5.第一类终端设备与第二类终端设备支持的载波聚合(carrier aggregation，CA)能力不同。例如，第一类终端设备可以支持载波聚合，而第二类终端设备不支持载波聚合；又例如，第二类终端设备与第一类终端设备都支持载波聚合，但是第一类终端设备同时支持的载波聚合的最大小区个数大于第二类终端设备同时支持的载波聚合的最大小区个数。
6.第一类终端设备与第二类终端设备的频分双工(frequency division duplex，FDD)能力不同。例如，第一类终端设备可以支持全双工FDD，而第二类终端设备可以仅支持半双工FDD。
7.第二类终端设备和第一类终端设备对数据的处理时间能力不同，例如，第一类终端设备接收下行数据与发送对该下行数据的反馈之间的最小时延小于第二类终端设备接收下行数据与发送对该下行数据的反馈之间的最小时延。
8.第一类终端设备与第二类终端设备对应的上行和/或下行，传输峰值速率不同。
下面对本申请实施例中涉及的技术术语进行说明。
1)时间单元，可以指一个时隙(slot)或子帧或包括一定数量符号的时间单元，或者也可以是时间跨度。在本申请实施例中，以时间单元是一个时隙为例。一个时隙的一部分可以是指一个时隙内的用于上行传输的符号(symbol)，比如，从一个上下行转换点开始到时隙边界的符号，或者从一个上下行转换点开始到下一个上下行转换点的用于上行传输的符号。针对下行传输来说，一个时隙的一部分可以是从一个时隙边界开始到一个上下行转换点的用于下行传输的符号，或者从一个上下行转换点开始到时隙边界的用于下行传输的符号、或者从一个上下行转换点开始到下一个上下行转换点的用于下行传输的符号。在本申请中，如果没有特殊说明，符号均指时域符号，这里的时域符号可以是正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号，也可以是离散傅里叶变换扩频OFDM(Discrete Fourier Transform-spread-OFDM，DFT-s-OFDM)符号。
2)载波带宽部分(carrier bandwidth part)，可以是频域上一段连续的资源，载波带宽部分还可以称为带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP或BP)、子带、子带(subband)带宽、窄带或窄带(narrowband)带宽，或者还可以有其他的名称，本申请实施例对载波带宽部分的名称不做限定，在本文中，为了简便，以名称是BWP为例。
本文所述的载波带宽部分可以是下行载波带宽部分，用于终端设备进行下行接收，此时该载波带宽部分的带宽可超过终端设备的接收带宽能力；或者，载波带宽部分也可以是上行载波带宽部分，用于终端设备进行上行发送，此时该载波带宽部分的带宽可超过终端设备的发送带宽能力。在本申请实施例中，终端设备的带宽能力可以是终端设备支持的信道带宽，或是终端设备支持的最大信道带宽，或是终端设备支持的最大传输带宽，或是终端设备支持的资源块(resource block，RB)数量，或是终端设备支持的最大资源块数量。
在NR中，网络设备可为终端设备配置BWP，终端设备在被配置的BWP上进行信息传输。本文中的信息传输可以是信道传输、信令传输、数据传输或参考信号传输。这里的传输可以是发送，也可以是接收。
3)跳频(frequency hopping)，是指接收端和发送端双方按照预定规则变换信息传输过程中所使用的频域资源的一种通信方式，以便获得频率分集增益。图2为跳频信号的一种 示意图。如图2所示，在时域上包括5个时间段：t1至t5，在频域上包括3个频域资源：f1至f3，t1至t5这5个时间段对应频域资源分别为f3、f1、f2、f3和f1。相对而言，图3为不跳频信号的一种示意图。如图3所示，在时域上包括5个时间段：t1至t5，在频域上包括3个频域资源：f1至f3，t1至t5这5个时间段对应频域资源分别均为f2。
在NR系统中，支持上行信息重复发送时的slot间(inter-slot)跳频或slot内(intra-slot)跳频，以及支持上行信息不重复发送时的slot内(intra-slot)跳频。以PUSCH为例，由无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令指示采用intra-slot跳频还是采用inter-slot跳频，再由调度信令(比如DCI)指示数据传输中是否会使用跳频。同时，调度信令还指示了数据传输的时频资源。需要说明的是，本文中的信息传输可以是信道传输、信令传输、数据传输或参考信号传输。这里的传输可以是发送，也可以是接收。本文中的上行信息可以是上行信道承载的信息，例如PUCCH或PUSCH。
slot内(intra-slot)跳频指的是用于信息传输的频域资源在slot内按照预定规则进行变化。以slot内两跳跳频为例，将需要传输的信息分为2个部分，这两个部分在slot内使用不同的频域资源进行传输。以发送端发送PUCCH为例，假设PUCCH的长度为L，即PUCCH占用L个符号，发送端以时隙内跳频的方式发送PUCCH，可将PUCCH分为第一跳和第二跳，其中，以L个符号中的前
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000009
个符号在第一频域资源上发送第一跳，L个符号中
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000010
个符号在第二频域资源上发送第二跳。第一频域资源和第二频域资源可有交集，也可无交集。为了便于理解，请参见图4，图4为intra-slot跳频的一种示意图。如图4所示，在时域上包括1个slot，在频域上包括2个频域资源：f1和f2。发送端发送的PUCCH包括两个部分，分别为第一部分和第二部分。以PUCCH占用8个符号为例，发送端在符号6至符号9上使用频域资源f2发送第一部分，在符号10至符号13上使用频域资源f1发送第二部分。图4中的阴影部分表示发送PUCCH所占用的资源。需要说明的是，在OFDM符号采用常规循环前缀(normal cyclic prefix，NCP)情况下，一个slot可以包括14个符号；在OFDM符号采用扩展循环前缀(extended cyclic prefix，ECP)的情况下，一个slot可以包括12个符号。本申请的实施例中以一个slot包括14个符号为例。
slot间(inter-slot)跳频指的是用于信息传输的频域资源在slot内保持不变，但用于信息传输的频域资源在不同slot间按照预定规则进行变化。图5为inter-slot跳频的一种示意图。如图5所示，在时域上包括2个slot，每个slot有14个符号，在频域上包括2个频域资源：f1和f2。发送端在第1个slot上使用频域资源f1发送数据，在第2个slot上使用频域资源f2发送数据。需要说明的是，本申请实施例还提供了新的上行信道传输方式，该传输方式也可能是在多个时隙内以跳频的方式传输上行信道。为了区分，下文中将本申请实施例提供的“在多个时隙内以跳频的方式传输上行信道”的方式统称为跨时隙跳频传输方式。
终端设备可以在多个时隙内重复发送上行信道，具体的重复发送次数N repeat可由网络设备配置。例如，网络设备可配置N repeat等于1、2、4或8等。当N repeat大于1时，网络设备还可以配置上行信道是否以跳频的方式发送，以及还配置上行信道以时隙内跳频的传输方式或时隙间跳频的传输方式发送。以上行信道是PUSCH为例，网络设备配置PUSCH在多个时隙内重复发送，并配置以时隙内跳频的传输方式发送PUSCH。除此之外，网络设备还可以通过下行信令指示终端设备是否按照配置的跳频传输方式发送PUSCH。例如，网络设备可向终端设备发送DCI，可通过该DCI中的1比特来指示终端设备按照配置的跳频传输方式重复发送N repeat次PUSCH，或者以不跳频的传输方式重复发送N repeat次PUSCH。
应理解，本实施例中的发送1次上行信道也可以称为发送1个上行信道。
以上行信道是PUCCH为例，网络设备会为正常终端设备配置用于发送PUCCH的资源，以及配置或指示一些参数。正常终端设备根据这些参数，在网络设备配置的资源上发送PUCCH。例如，网络设备可为正常终端设备配置第一PUCCH资源(也称为第一PUCCH格式)，可为PUCCH格式0到PUCCH格式4中的一种格式。网络设备还配置或指示如表1所示的参数，辅助正常终端设备发送PUCCH。
表1 为正常终端设备配置的参数
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000011
正常终端设备根据表所示的参数，在第一PUCCH资源上发送PUCCH。从表1可以看出网络设备如果指示正常终端设备以跳频方式发送PUCCH，那么网络设备还指示PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号。如表1所示，对于时隙内跳频来说，正常终端设备可根据PUCCH的长度，以及PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号确定PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号。
举例来说，请参见图6，为正常终端设备以时隙内跳频的传输方式重复发送PUCCH的一示意图。图6以N repeat等于2为例。根据表1可知，网络设备配置PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号的编号为S1，假设PUCCH的长度是L，那么PUCCH的第一跳的长度L1等于
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000012
PUCCH的第二跳的长度L2为
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000013
PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号S2为
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000014
请参见图7，为正常终端设备以时隙内跳频的传输方式重复发送PUCCH的另一示意图。图7以重复发送次数N repeat等于4，PUCCH的长度为L为例。由于PUCCH以时隙内跳频的传输方式发送，那么在每个时隙内，以L个符号中的前L1个符号发送该PUCCH的第一跳，以L个符号中L2个符号发送该PUCCH的第二跳。应理解，图7中的L1即为
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000015
L2即为
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000016
每个时隙内PUCCH的第一跳占用的第一个符号(在本文中也称为起始符号)的编号相同，每个时隙内PUCCH的第二跳占用的起始符号的编号也相同。如图7所示，每个时隙内PUCCH的第一跳占用的起始符号的编号均为S1，PUCCH的第二跳占用的起始符号的编号均为S2。
应理解，本实施例中，符号编号在每个时隙的开始均重新编号，每个时隙内的第一个符号编号为0。
图6和图7以正常终端设备以时隙内跳频的传输方式重复发送PUCCH为例。在一些实施例中，网络设备可配置正常终端设备以时隙间跳频传输方式重复发送PUCCH。请参见图8，为正常终端设备以时隙间跳频传输方式重复发送PUCCH的示意图。图8以重复发送次数N repeat等于4，PUCCH的长度为L为例。由于PUCCH以时隙间跳频的传输方式发送，在每个时隙内以L个符号发送该PUCCH，相邻两次发送PUCCH占用的频域资源不同。每个时隙内PUCCH占用的起始符号的编号相同。如图8所示，每个时隙内PUCCH占用的起始符号的编号均为S1。
需要说明的是，图6至图8均以PUCCH的第一跳在第m个时隙发送为例。时隙m的确定和如下至少一种有关：网络设备发送的DCI所在的时隙d、网络设备发送的DCI调度的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的时隙n、以及DCI指示的HARQ反馈时隙偏移k有关。以DCI调度PDSCH为例，网络设备发送的DCI调度的PDSCH的时隙为n，DCI指示的HARQ反馈时隙偏移为k，则m＝n+k。为了便于描述，下文中以终端设备从第m个时隙发送PUCCH为例。除非有特别说明。应理解，第m个时隙对应的时隙编号可能不是m。例如，如果时隙编号在每个无线帧的开始均重新编号，每个无线帧的开始的第一个时隙编号为0，则，所述的第m个时隙在当前无线帧中对应的时隙编号为m-1。
如上介绍了本申请实施例可适用的网络架构以及涉及的术语，下面介绍与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的技术特征。
终端设备可采用如上述的三种传输方式中的任意一种发送上行信道。即终端设备可采用不跳频传输方式、时隙内跳频传输方式以及时隙间跳频传输方式中的任意一种传输方式发送上行信道。通常来说，终端设备在不超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行下行信道接收或上行信道发送。这种情况下，终端设备不需要频率调谐，如图9所示。图9中下行信道接收或上行信道发送所占用的频域资源为图9中的阴影部分。在可能的场景中，可能需要终端设备在更大的频率范围内进行下行信道接收或上行信道发送。例如，通常来说，网络设备会为终端设备配置公共PUCCH资源或专用PUCCH资源，用于终端设备发送PUCCH。当没有配置专用PUCCH资源时，终端设备可以从预定义或配置好的多个公共PUCCH资源集合中的一个公共PUCCH资源集合中确定发送针对例如Msg4的混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat reQuest，HARQ)反馈(acknowledge，ACK)(HARQ-ACK)信息。如果存在第一类终端设备和第二类终端设备，也就是存在正常终端设备和低复杂度终端设备。对于低复杂度终端设备来说，因为低复杂度终端设备的带宽能力有限，如果已经配置或者预定义的公共PUCCH资源的频域跨度超过低复杂度终端设备支持的最大信道带宽，低复杂度终端设备为了使用所述公共PUCCH资源，需要在超过该终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围进行PUCCH的发送。这就需要低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐，以在更大的频率范围内进行信息接收或信息发送。如图10所示，低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围进行上行信道的发送时，低复杂度终端设备需要M个符号的时间进行频率调谐。由于M个符号用来频率调谐，因此上行信道的传输不能在这M个符号的调谐时间上进行发送，所以，由于频域调谐，终端设备需要丢弃一部分符号，这些符号不会被发送，这会导致低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输的性能下降。需要说明的是，频率调谐也可以认为是频率切换，或中心频点切换。
应理解，所述Msg4可以理解为终端设备的竞争解决标识。在随机接入过程中，针对承载了终端设备竞争解决标识的物理下行共享信道PDSCH，终端设备要通过PUCCH发送 HARQ反馈信息。所述Msg4也可以理解为所述PDSCH承载的消息。
低复杂度终端设备在M个符号的时间进行频率调谐，也可以理解为这M个符号被打掉不能传输上行信道，但是正常终端设备在这M个符号是可以发送上行信道的，这就无法避免低复杂度终端设备对正常终端设备的干扰。例如，原始有N个符号用于发送低复杂度终端设备或正常终端设备的上行信道。对于低复杂度终端设备来说，采用N个符号中的M个符号进行频率调谐，即M个符号被打掉，那么低复杂度终端设备发送上行信道采用的正交序列的长度由N变为N-M。但是对于正常终端设备来说，发送上行信道采用的正交序列的长度还是N，显然无法保证低复杂终端设备和正常终端设备发送上行信道的正交性，对正常终端设备发送上行信道造成干扰，导致正常终端设备发送上行信道的性能下降。
鉴于此，本申请实施例提供了四种新的上行信道的传输方式，即使低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行下行信道接收或上行信道发送，也能减少低复杂度终端设备发送上行信道的性能下降。且能够降低低复杂度终端设备对正常终端设备进行下行信道接收或上行信道发送的干扰，尽量避免正常终端设备的信道传输性能的下降。
本申请实施例提供的任意一种新的上行信道的传输方式都是在一个或多个时间单元以跳频方式发送上行信道。另外，当在多个时间单元以跳频方式发送上行信道时，可将本申请实施例提供的四种新的上行信道的传输方式称为跨时间单元跳频传输方式。以时间单元是时隙为例，那么跨时间单元跳频传输方式也称为跨时隙(cross-slot)跳频传输方式。为了便于描述，下文以时间单元是时隙为例，将本申请实施例提供的四种新的上行信道传输方式称为第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式，第四传输方式。
下面分别介绍本申请实施例提供的第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式以及第四传输方式。在下文中，以上行信道是PUCCH为例，除非指出上行信道是PUSCH。另外，统一以PUCCH的符号个数是L，且PUCCH的第一跳的符号个数为L1，PUCCH的第二跳的符号个数为L2，其中，L1+L2＝L，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000017
为例，除非有特别说明。用N表示终端设备在N个符号内进行频率调谐，除非有特别说明。
需要说明的是，N也可以表示在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道时进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数。所述N可以网络设备预配置的、和/或协议预定义的、和/或根据终端设备上报的能力信息/辅助信息确定的。“能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数”可以是网络设备指示的符号个数，例如预配置的用于频率调谐的符号个数是5，那么“能够采用的最大符号个数”是5。应理解，终端设备实际需要的用于频率调谐的符号个数可能小于N，或刚好为N，也可能不是整数个符号。终端设备实际需要的用于频率调谐的符号个数也可能大于N。例如，网络设备指示用于频率调谐的符号个数为14，但终端设备实际需要的用于频率调谐的符号个数为16。本文以时间单元包括的个数是P为例，由于下文中以时间单元是时隙为例，所以P＝14。
应理解，第一带宽阈值可以是终端设备支持的最大传输带宽。在有些情况，第一带宽阈值也可以小于终端设备支持的最大传输带宽，只要终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道时需要进行频率调谐即可。
第一传输方式为：在第m个时隙内发送上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时隙内发送上行信道的第二跳。其中，用于发送上行信道的第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送上行信道的第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X＝14×n，n为正整数。 也可以认为，发送上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与发送上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔X个符号，X为14的整数倍。m和h均为正整数。应理解，所述上行信道的第一跳和所述上行信道的第二跳属于同一个上行信道，也就是一个上行信道在第m个时隙和第m+h个时隙内发送。需要说明的是，本文中“上行信道的第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号与上行信道的第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号”中，X个符号不包括上行信道的第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，以及上行信道的第二跳的符号中的第一个符号。
示例性的，如果规定发送上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与发送上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔X个符号，那么可预定义X，或者网络设备配置X，或者X是由网络设备通过动态信令指示的。例如，网络设备通过DCI指示X为14或者28。如果规定发送上行信道的第一跳的结束符号以发送上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14×n个符号，那么可预定义n，或者网络设备配置n，或者网络设备通过动态信令指示n。例如，网络设备通过DCI指示n为1，那么X为14；网络设备通过DCI指示n为2，那么X为28，以此类推。
由于第一传输方式规定了上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有一定数量的符号，那么对于低复杂终端设备而言，即使在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行上行信道接收或上行信道发送，也可以在一定数量的符号内进行频率调谐，从而能减少低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。
举例来说，一旦网络设备配置公共PUCCH资源，那么PUCCH资源在时隙中的起始符号和符号长度就确定了，且PUCCH资源对应的候选频域位置也就确定了。而公共PUCCH资源是所有终端设备共享的，也就是正常终端设备和低复杂度终端设备共享公共PUCCH资源。对于正常终端设备而言，可根据网络设备指示的频域资源位置发送PUCCH。为了使得低复杂度终端设备可与正常终端设备复用公共PUCCH资源，在本申请实施例中，低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内发送PUCCH时，以第一传输方式发送PUCCH。也就是在多个时隙内以跳频方式发送一个PUCCH，且该PUCCH的第一跳和该PUCCH的第二跳之间间隔X个符号。对于低复杂终端设备而言，即使在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行PUCCH接收或PUCCH发送，也可以在这X个符号内进行频率调谐，并不会影响PUCCH的发送和/或接收，从而能减少低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH传输性能的下降。
另外，由于X＝14×n，所以低复杂度终端设备可确定PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号与正常终端设备采用时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH时的第二跳的起始符号的编号相同。这样网络设备可通过系统消息统一配置公共PUCCH资源(格式)，无需单独为低复杂度终端设备配置单独的PUCCH格式，可减少信令开销和资源开销。例如沿用目前PUCCH格式为终端设备配置PUCCH资源，那么每个时隙的候选PUCCH符号位置仍然不变，可减少用于发送PUCCH的资源，也不会占用为其他终端设备分配的资源。
为了便于理解，请参见图11，为本申请实施例提供的低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH采用的时频资源示意图。图11以X＝14为例，图11中的“X”表示不发送。在图11中，示意了PUCCH在时隙m内以跳频方式发送，以及示意了PUCCH在时隙m和时隙m+1以跳频方式发送。如图11所示，通常网络设备会为终端设备配置PUCCH以何种跳频方式发送，并配置PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号的编号，例如为S1。如果网络设备没有配置PUCCH以何种跳频方式发送，例如，在终端设备获得专用的PUCCH配置之前，正常终端 设备会以时隙内跳频的传输方式发送PUCCH。假设网络设备为终端设备配置以时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH，PUCCH的长度为L个符号。可知，PUCCH的第一跳的长度为L1，PUCCH的第二跳的长度为L2，PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号S2为S1+L1。对于正常终端设备而言，会在时隙m内以跳频方式发送PUCCH，即在时隙m内从起始符号S1开始以L1个符号发送PUCCH的第一跳，从起始符号S2开始以L2个符号发送PUCCH的第二跳。对于低复杂度终端设备而言，该低复杂度终端设备可确定采用第一传输方式发送PUCCH，即在两个时隙发送一个PUCCH。如图11所示，在第m个时隙从起始符号S1开始连续L1个符号发送PUCCH的第一跳，以及在第m+1时隙从起始符号S2开始连续L2个符号发送PUCCH的第二跳。从图11可以看出，第一跳和第二跳之间间隔14个符号，那么在时隙m+1的起始符号S2与在时隙m的第二跳的起始符号S2相同。所以低复杂度终端设备可沿用正常终端设备在时隙内跳频发送PUCCH的配置确定第二跳的起始符号的编号。应理解，当X＝14时，h＝1。
又例如，请参见表2，示出了PUCCH资源配置以及正常终端设备和低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH的参数。
表2
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000018
从表2可以看出，网络设备可通过PUCCH格式为低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备统一配置公共PUCCH资源。低复杂度终端设备以第一传输方式发送PUCCH，正常终端设备以时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH。低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备发送PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号S1相同，低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备发送PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号S2相同，所以可沿用网络设备为正常终端设备配置的PUCCH参数，无需单独为低复杂度终端设备配置PUCCH资源、更多的PUCCH参数等，可节约信令开销。
应理解，一般终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时间(以秒/毫秒/微妙为单位)是不随 SCS变化的，但如果SCS较大，那么低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备支持的最大信道带宽的频率范围内发送PUCCH时，低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的符号个数较多；相反，如果SCS较小，那么低复杂度终端设备在超过该低复杂度终端设备支持的最大信道带宽的频率范围内发送PUCCH时，低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的符号个数较少。通常来说，频率调谐只需要切换频点，所以频率调谐所需时间较短。例如，频率调谐所需最短时长约50微秒，最长时长一般约为200微秒左右。为了便于理解，请参见表3，示出了SCS大小与低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的符号个数的对应关系。表3以频率调谐所需时长为140微秒为例。
表3
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000019
从表3可以看出，如果SCS大于120KHz，那么终端设备进行频率调谐所需时长等价于16个符号的长度。这种情况下，显然X＝14还是会降低低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH的性能。因此，在本申请实施中，可根据SCS的大小，确定X的取值。SCS较小，X相应较小，这样可减少资源开销，减少PUCCH的发送时延；SCS较大，X相应较大，以为终端设备留有足够的时间进行频率调谐。这样可避免终端设备由于没有足够的时间进行频率调谐，而导致低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH时需要打掉PUCCH中的部分符号，影响低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH的性能。
在本申请实施例中，根据SCS的大小，X的取值有如下三种情况，下面分别介绍这三种情况。
情况一，SCS小于第一门限，那么X等于14。
情况二，SCS大于或等于第一门限，那么X大于或等于28。
需要说明的是，第一门限可根据终端设备进行频率调谐所需要的时长来确定。预先定义或配置第一门限。沿用表3的例子，终端设备进行频率调谐所需的时长为140us，换算到各个SCS下对应的符号个数，可确定第一取值为120KHz。即SCS小于120KHz，X＝14；SCS大于或等于120KHz，X大于或等于28，如图12所示，图12以X＝28为例。表3仅是举例，在一些实施例中，SCS更大，X的取值也可以相应变大，例如为42等。
应理解，当SCS较大时，X也适应性增大，这样虽然能够给终端设备留有足够的时间进行频率调谐，但是带来了PUCCH的发送时延。为了降低时延，在一些实施例中，即使SCS大于或等于第一门限，X也可以等于14。这种情况下，可规定低复杂度终端设备支持的PUCCH的符号个数的最小值，即使X＝14，也能够尽量保证以低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占PUCCH的符号个数的比例较小，尽量保证低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH的可靠性。
情况三，SCS大于或等于第一门限，PUCCH的符号个数大于或等于第二门限，X＝14。其中，第二门限可根据低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占PUCCH的中符号个数的比例所满足的条件而确定。例如，低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占 PUCCH的中符号个数的比例需要小于或等于50％，那么第二门限可以等于4。第二门限也可以认为是用于发送上行信道的最小符号个数。以SCS等于120KHz为例，根据表3可知，低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐需要16个符号，当X＝14，就意味着低复杂度终端设备发送PUCCH需要打掉2个符号。当规定低复杂度终端设备支持的PUCCH的最小符号个数等于4，那么低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占PUCCH的符号个数的比例就会小于或等于50％。本申请实施例可预定义或配置第二门限，或预定义或配置低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐而丢弃的符号占PUCCH的符号个数的最大比例，例如规定最大比例为50％或20％。
第二传输方式为：在第m个时隙内发送上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时隙内发送上行信道的第二跳，其中，用于发送第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，X为正整数，m为正整数，h为大于或等于0的。其中，X与SCS相关。或者，X与上行信道的符号个数L和终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道时进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数N相关。或者，X与SCS以及L和N相关。应理解，所述上行信道的第一跳和所述上行信道的第二跳属于同一个上行信道，也就是一个上行信道在第m个时隙和第m+h个时隙内发送。
与前述第一传输方式的相同之处在于，第二传输方式也规定了在一个或多个时隙内以跳频方式发送一个PUCCH，且该PUCCH的第一跳和该PUCCH的第二跳之间间隔X个符号。对于低复杂终端设备而言，即使在超过该低复杂度终端设备的最大信道带宽的频率范围内进行PUCCH接收或PUCCH发送，也可以在这X个符号内进行频率调谐，并不会影响PUCCH的发送和/或PUCCH的接收，从而能减少低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH传输性能的下降。
与前述第一传输方式的不同之处在于，第二跳频传输方式中，X可以小于14，这样PUCCH的第一跳和PUCCH的第二跳可位于同一个时隙内，即h＝0。X也可以不是14的整数倍。
作为一种示例，本申请实施例可根据L和N来确定X，从而尽量降低发送PUCCH的时延，以及尽量节约资源开销，更为灵活。L、N以及X之间的关系有如下三种情况。
情况四，当L+N小于或等于14时，X＝N或X大于N。应理解，L和X总和小于或等于14，那么只需要为终端设备留有X个符号用于频率调谐即可，既能够保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，也不会影响终端设备发送PUCCH的性能。另外，PUCCH的第一跳和PUCCH的第二跳还可位于同一个时隙内，可避免PUCCH时延增加。
为了便于理解，请参见图13，为低复杂终端设备发送PUCCH的时频资源示意图。图13以L+N小于14为例。从图13可以看出，当L+N小于14，如果X大于或等于14，显然会降低发送PUCCH的时延。因此，在这种情况下，X可大于或等于N，既能够保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，也不会影响终端设备发送PUCCH的性能，同时可尽量降低发送PUCCH的时延。应理解，图13中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000020
L2＝L-L1。需要说明的是，当X＝N，第二传输方式实际上是在一个时隙内发送一个PUCCH。与目前时隙内跳频传输方式的不同之处在于，PUCCH的第一跳和PUCCH的第二跳之间间隔X个符号。
情况五，当L+N大于14时，X大于或等于14n，n为正整数。应理解，L和N总和大于14，要么终端设备进行频率调谐所需的时长较长，要么上行信道的符号个数L较多。为了保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，本申请实施例可设置X＝14×n，或者X大于 14×n。
为了便于理解，请参见图14，为低复杂终端设备发送PUCCH的时频资源示意图。图13以L+N大于14为例。当L+N大于14，如果X小于14，那么可能无法保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，会导致终端设备发送PUCCH时会打掉PUCCH的部分符号，从而影响发送PUCCH的性能。为此，这种情况下，本申请实施例可确定X大于或等于14×n，以尽量保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐。如图14所示，图14以n＝1为例。应理解，X＝14×n的具体实现以及有益效果可参见前述第一传输方式中相关内容的介绍，这里不再赘述。X大于14×n的情况下，本申请实施例可预先定义或配置X＝14n+s，s为正整数。
情况六，当L+N大于14×s，且L+N小于或等于14×(s+1)时，X大于或等于14×s，s为正整数。
应理解，如果L和N总和大于14×s，且小于14×(s+1)。为了给终端设备留有足够的时间进行频率调谐，可确定X大于或等于14×s。同理，X＝14×s的实现具体以及有益效果可参见前述第一传输方式中相关内容的介绍，这里不再赘述。X大于14s的情况下，本申请实施例可预先定义或配置X＝14s+S，S为正整数。
作为另一种示例，网络设备可配置X。例如网络设备可广播系统消息，该系统消息可承载X的取值。这样不同终端设备对应的X的取值均相同。当然，网络设备也可以针对每个终端设备分别配置X；或者，网络设备也可以针对第一类终端设备配置相同取值的X，针对第二类终端设备配置相同取值的X。又或者，网络设备也可以针对每个小区，或者BWP或者每个SCS分别配置X。其中，每个小区可对应X的一个候选值或多个候选值，同理，每个BWP可对应X的一个候选值或多个候选值；每个SCS可对应X的一个候选值或多个候选值。
作为再一种示例，X可以是预定义的，例如，针对每个小区，或者BWP或者每个SCS预定义X的一个候选值。或者，针对每个小区、BWP或每个SCS预定义X的多个候选值。当预定义了X的多个候选值的情况下，网络设备可从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值，并告知终端设备使用该候选值发送PUCCH。或者，终端设备可根据上报的能力信息或辅助信息从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值，并使用该候选值发送PUCCH，并将该候选值告知网络设备。
可预先定义SCS的候选值与X的候选值的对应关系，例如表4。如果SCS的一个候选值对应X的多个候选值，那么网络设备可从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值告知低复杂度终端设备根据该取值发送PUCCH。或者低复杂度终端设备也可以上报能力信息或辅助信息从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值，并告知网络设备，以根据该候选值发送PUCCH，更为灵活。例如低复杂度终端设备根据自身的能力从这多个取值中选择一个候选值。
表4(表中的值表示符号个数)
SCS X1 X2(对应1ms)
15KHz 2 14
30KHz 4 28
60KHz 8 56
120KHz 16 112
针对表4，网络设备可用1个比特指示X是X1还是X2，或终端设备上报能力信息指示是X1还是X2。应理解，一旦确定了是X1还是X2，则确定了每个SCS对应的X值。
应理解，所述N也可是预定义的、或预配置的。如上所述，在定义了N的情况下，所述X是根据所述N并根据一定的规则确定的，或所述X是根据网络设备的配置确定的。
例如，N可以是预定义的，例如，针对每个小区，或者BWP或者每个SCS预定义N的一个候选值。或者，针对每个小区、BWP或每个SCS预定义N的多个候选值。当预定义了N的多个候选值的情况下，网络设备可从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值，并告知终端设备使用该候选值。或者，终端设备可上报能力信息或辅助信息从这多个候选值中选择一个候选值，并告知网络设备，并使用该候选值。
可预先定义SCS的候选值与N的候选值的对应关系，例如表5。
网络设备可用1个比特指示N是N1还是N2，或终端设备上报能力信息指示是N1还是N2。应理解，一旦确定了是N1还是N2，则确定了每个SCS对应的N值。
表5(表中的值表示符号个数)
SCS N1 N2(对应1ms)
15KHz 2 14
30KHz 4 28
60KHz 8 56
120KHz 16 112
举例来说，请参见图15，为低复杂终端设备发送上行信道的时频资源示意图。低复杂终端设备在时隙m内以第一频域资源发送第一次的PUCCH的第一跳，间隔X个符号之后，以第二频域资源发送第一次的PUCCH的第二跳。应理解，图15中，上行信道的长度为L，那么
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000021
L2＝L-L1。
如果X是预定义的或者网络配置的，考虑到终端设备可能会重复发送PUCCH，那么相邻两次跳频之间的前一跳的结束符号和下一跳的起始符号之间都间隔X个符号。X可尽量接近终端设备进行频率调谐的符号个数，这样可在保证终端设备有一定间隔进行频率调谐的前提下，尽量避免时延的增加。
举例来说，请参见图16，为低复杂终端设备发送上行信道的时频资源示意图。低复杂终端设备在时隙m内以第一频域资源发送第一次的PUCCH的第一跳，间隔X个符号之后，以第二频域资源发送第一次的PUCCH的第二跳；之后间隔X个符号，以第一频域资源发送第二次的PUCCH的第一跳，之后再间隔X个符号，以第二频域资源发送第二次的PUCCH的第二跳，以此类推。应理解，图16中，上行信道的长度为L，那么
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000022
L2＝L-L1。
前述第一传输方式和第二传输方式都规定了上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳之间间隔X个符号。作为第一传输方式和第二传输方式的一种可替换的方案，本申请实施例提供了第三频传输方式。第三传输方式规定了上行信道的第一跳的起始符号的编号和上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号之间的关系。低复杂终端设备可根据上行信道的第一跳的起始符号的编号和上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号之间的关系，确定上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号，并发送上行信道。
例如，第三传输方式为：在第m个时隙内以L1个符号发送上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时隙内以L2个符号发送上行信道的第二跳。所述上行信道的第一跳和所述上行信 道的第二跳属于同一个上行信道，也就是一个上行信道在第m个时隙和第m+h个时隙内发送。其中，L1个符号中的第一个符号的编号为S1，L2个符号中的第一个符号的编号为S2，S2和S1满足如下任一种关系：
1)S2＝S1。即上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号与上行信道的第一跳的起始符号的编号相同。
这种情况下，上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14-L1个符号。由于上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14-L1个符号，所以即使低复杂终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道，也能够在这14-L1个符号上进行频率调谐，从而减少低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。
2)S2＝S1+L1。
这种情况下，上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14个符号。这样即使低复杂终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道，也能够在这14个符号上进行频率调谐，从而减少低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。另外，由于上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14个符号，所以低复杂度终端设备可确定PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号与正常终端设备采用时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH时的第二跳的起始符号的编号相同。这样网络设备可通过系统消息统一配置公共PUCCH资源(格式)，无需单独为低复杂度终端设备配置单独的PUCCH格式，可减少信令开销和资源开销。例如沿用目前PUCCH格式为终端设备配置PUCCH资源，那么每个时隙的候选PUCCH符号位置仍然不变，与现有技术兼容性更好。
3)S2＝S1-L1。
这种情况下，上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14-2×L1。由于上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14-2×L1个符号，所以即使低复杂终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道，也能够在这14-2×L1个符号上进行频率调谐，从而减少低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。另外，由于上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔14-2×L1个符号，即间隔尽量较少符号，以减少发送上行信道的时延。
应理解，为了尽量保证低复杂度终端设备有足够时间来进行频率调谐，同时尽量降低发送上行信道的时延。另外，也为了网络设备调度资源的灵活性，终端设备发送上行信道时可从S2的3个候选值中选择一个候选值。例如，针对某一SCS，终端设备可根据L以及N，从S2的多个候选值集合确定从哪个候选值集合中选择S2的一个候选值，更为灵活。例如，S2可以从候选值集合中选择，候选值集合可以是[S1+L1，S1-L1]，也可以是[S1+L1，S1]或者[S1，S1-L1]，或者，候选值集合是[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]。本申请实施例，终端设备从多个候选值集合中选择一个或多个候选值集合，可能有如下三种情况。
一个或多个候选值集合可由协议预定义，或网络设备预配置，或根据终端设备上报能力信息/辅助信息确定。一旦确定了一个或多个候选值集合，可由网络设备预配置或动态指示具体使用哪个候选值，或先根据预定义规则从一个或多个候选集合中确定可用候选值集合，然后根据动态指示从可用候选值集合中指示一个元素。
本申请实施例，以可用候选值集合(在文本中也称为第一集合)为[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1] 为例，如下描述终端设备从第一集合中如何确定可用候选值集合，可能有如下三种情况。
情况七，如果14-L1小于N，也就是L1与N之和大于14。这种情况下，可认为要么终端设备进行频率调谐所需的时长较长，要么上行信道的符号个数L较多。为了保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，本申请实施例可确定S2＝S1+L1，即可用候选值集合只包括一个元素。即上行信道的第一跳的结束符号与上行信道的第二跳的起始符号之间间隔X个符号，X＝14×n。
情况八，如果14-2×L1大于或等于N，也就是，L和N总和小于或等于14。这种情况下，所述S2的三个候选值均能满足在相邻的两跳之间留有N个符号用于频率调谐即可。这样既能够保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，减少对终端设备发送PUCCH的性能的影响。因此，可用候选值集合包括所述3个候选值。本申请实施例可从[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]选择一个元素作为S2，即S2＝S1，或者，S2＝S1+L1，或者S2＝S1-L1，可增加了网络设备调度资源的灵活性。
情况九，如果14-L1大于或等于N，且14-2×L1小于N。这种情况下，所述S2的三个候选值中只有S2＝S1和S2＝S1+L1能满足在相邻的两跳之间留有N个符号用于频率调谐。因此，可用候选值集合包括2个候选值：[S1+L1，S1]。本申请实施例可从[S1+L1，S1]选择一个元素作为S2。即S2＝S1或S2＝S1+L1。这样，能优先保证终端设备有足够的时间进行频率调谐，也能减少对终端设备发送PUCCH的性能的影响。
需要说明的是，上行信道的第二跳的起始符号可能对应多个时域资源候选位置，例如上行信道的第一跳位于时隙m，上行信道第二跳的起始符号可位于时隙m+1，也可以位于时隙m+2。那么上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的候选位置可包括时隙m+1的S2对应的3个时域位置，以及时隙m+2的S2对应的3个时域位置，共6个位置。为了便于描述，可将时隙m+1的S2对应的3个时域位置分别称为S21、S22和S23，那么有S21＝S1，S22＝S1+L1，S23＝S1-L1。同理，将时隙m+2的S2对应的3个时域位置分别称为S24、S25和S26，那么有S24＝S1，S25＝S1+L1，S26＝S1-L1。
这种情况下，14-L1小于N，S2可为[S22，S24，S25，S26]中的元素，即S2＝S21或S2＝S24。同理，14-2×L1大于或等于N，S2可为[S21，S22，S23，S24，S25，S26]中的元素；14-L1大于或等于N，且14-2×L1小于N，S2可为[S21，S22，S24，S25，S26]中的元素。
前述的第一传输方式、第二传输方式以及第三传输方式旨在针对低复杂度终端设备超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送一个上行信道的应用场景，规定上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳之间间隔一定数量的符号。即为低复杂度终端设备留有进行频率调谐的时间，尽量减少由于低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道时，由于进行频率调谐导致的上行信道传输性能的下降。
在可能的场景中，网络设备配置正常终端设备重复多次发送上行信道，网络设备配置低复杂度终端设备发送一次上行信道，也就是发送一个上行信道。例如，网络设备为正常终端设备配置第一PUCCH资源，并配置或指示如表1所示的参数。网络设备为低复杂度终端设备配置第二PUCCH资源，例如网络设备为低复杂度终端设备配置第二PUCCH格式。网络设备为低复杂度终端设备配置例如表6-1所示的参数。
表6-1 为低复杂度终端设备配置的部分参数
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000023
虽然低复杂度终端设备的最大带宽能力较小，但为了低复杂度终端设备也能获得较大的频域跳频增益，并且提高资源利用的效率，网络设备可为低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备配置相同的频域资源。例如，网络设备为低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备配置相同的BWP。又例如，网络设备为低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备配置的BWP不同，但是网络设备为低复杂度终端设备配置的频域资源，和网络设备为正常终端设备配置的频域资源相同。请参见表6-2，示出了网络设备为低复杂度终端设备配置的频域参数。
表6-2 为低复杂度终端设备配置的频域参数
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000024
当低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备共存的情况下，低复杂度终端设备仍然可采用如前述的第一传输方式、第二传输方式，或第三传输方式发送PUCCH。当然，低复杂度终端设备也可能采用时隙内跳频的传输方式发送PUCCH。例如，网络设备可为低复杂度终端设备配置如表6-3所示的传输方式的参数。
表6-3 为低复杂度终端设备配置的传输方式的参数
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000026
通常来说，不同终端设备所占用的时频资源不同会减少终端设备之间的互相干扰，以尽量提高上行传输的性能。当然，当两个终端设备上行发送所占用的时频资源相同时，也可以通过码分复用的方式减少终端设备之间的干扰。考虑到当低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备共存的情况下，为了使得低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备更好地共享PUCCH资源，以节约资源开销。在本申请实施例中，可尽量避免低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备占用相同的时频资源。例如，网络设备配置正常终端设备在时隙m或时隙m+1发送PUCCH，并指示低复杂度终端设备使用第二PUCCH资源发送PUCCH。第二PUCCH资源对应的时域资源包括时隙m和时隙m+1。由于在时隙m和时隙m+1内，正常终端设备在被配置的频域资源发送PUCCH，为了避免低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备的时频资源重叠，低复杂度终端设备与正常终端设备可采用不同的频率资源。
在可能的实现方式中，网络设备可配置正常终端设备和低复杂度终端设备要发送的PUCCH的第一跳的起始频域位置不同，以及配置正常终端设备和低复杂度终端设备要发送的PUCCH的第二跳的起始频域位置不同。且正常终端设备的PUCCH的第一跳的起始频域位置与低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第二跳的起始频域位置相同，正常终端设备的PUCCH的第二跳的起始频域位置与低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第一跳的起始频域位置相同。正常终端设备的PUCCH的第一跳的时域位置与低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第一跳的时域位置可相同，这样可节约资源开销。
举例来说，网络设备配置正常终端设备以时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH，且发送PUCCH的次数N repeat大于1。网络设备配置第一PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号，例如为第一PRB，网络设备配置第一PUCCH资源的跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号，例如为第二PRB。网络设备配置低复杂度终端设备以跨时隙跳频传输方式(例如第一传输方式或第二传输方式或第三传输方式)发送PUCCH。网络设备配置第二PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号为第二PRB，网络设备配置第二PUCCH资源的跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号为第一PRB。
作为一种可替换的方案，网络设备可为所有终端设备配置相同的PUCCH资源，以及第一PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号和第一PUCCH资源跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号。正常终端设备可采用网络设备的配置发送PUCCH。针对低复杂度终端设备，网络设备还可另外动态指示第二PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号，以及第二PUCCH资源跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号。
示例性的，网络设备配置第一PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号为第一PRB，第一PUCCH资源的跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号为第二PRB。正常终端设备可采用第一PUCCH资源发送PUCCH。针对低复杂度终端设备，网络设备可向低复杂度终端设备发送指示信息，该指示信息用于指示低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第一跳的起始频域位置为第二PRB，以及低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第二跳的起始频域位置为第一PRB。或者，该指示信息可用于指示低复杂度设备终端设备发送PUCCH时，可将配置的第一PRB更新为第二PRB，以及将配置的第二PRB更新为第一PRB。
为了便于理解，请参见图17，为低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备发送PUCCH的时频资源的一示意图。图17以正常终端设备重复2次发送PUCCH，且以时隙内跳频方式发 送PUCCH为例。且图17以低复杂度终端设备发送1次PUCCH，且以第一传输方式为例。在图17中，网络设备配置第一PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号为第一PRB，第一PUCCH资源的跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号为第二PRB。网络设备可配置第二PUCCH资源的起始PRB编号为第二PRB，第一PUCCH资源的跳频发送的第二跳的起始PRB编号为第一PRB。从图17可以看出，低复杂度终端设备以第一传输方式发送PUCCH时，能够与正常终端设备共享PUCCH资源。且低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备占用不同的频域资源发送PUCCH，从而可节约资源开销。尤其，即使正常终端设备重复发送PUCCH，由于低复杂度终端设备采用跨时隙传输方式能够使得低复杂度终端设备的PUCCH的第二跳延后发送，所以仍然可以使用已经配置好的第一PUCCH，不需要单独为低复杂终端设备另外配置PUCCH资源。即不需要单独为低复杂终端设备配置新的PUCCH资源或PUCCH格式，从而进一步节约资源开销和信令开销。
前述实施例以低复杂度终端设备发送一个上行信道(例如PUCCH或PUSCH)为例。在一种可能的场景中，网络设备可配置低复杂度终端设备重复多次发送上行信道，也就是发送多个上行信道。例如，网络设备可沿用为正常配置重复发送上行信道的方法来实现配置低复杂度终端设备重复多次发送上行信道。例如，网络设备可通过配置nrofSlots参数来配置一个PUCCH格式的重复时隙个数。在本申请实施例中，针对低复杂度终端设备，网络设备也可以通过配置低复杂度终端设备要发送的上行信道的个数R来实现配置低复杂度终端设备重复R次发送上行信道。应理解，所述R也可是网络设备通过动态信令指示的，例如通过DCI或MAC CE。
例如，网络设备可为低复杂度终端设备配置例如表6-1到表6-3所示的参数。假设，网络设备配置/指示低复杂度终端设备发送上行信道所使用的频域资源是连续Nf个PRB资源。网络设备预配置或动态指示R次重复发送的第一次的上行信道的第一跳的起始频域位置的编号为第一PRB，跳频后(即第二跳)的起始频域位置的编号为第二PRB。应理解，如果上行信道是PUCCH，第一PRB和/或第二PRB可是网络设备预配置的，或网络设备动态指示的，或根据网络设备的指示以及预定义规则确定的。如果上行信道是PUSCH，调度PDSCH的DCI中的频域资源分配(frequency domain resource allocation，FDRA)域可指示第一PRB。第二PRB可以是网络设备预配置的，或根据网络设备指示的频域偏移以及第一PRB计算得到的。例如，第二PRB和第一PRB可根据如下公式计算得到。
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000027
在公式(1)中，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000028
表示第二PRB，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000029
表示第一PRB，offset表示网络设备指示的频域偏移，
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000030
表示用于计算上行信道资源的上行BWP。该BWP可以是低复杂度终端设备的初始上行BWP或激活上行BWP，或网络设备指示的专门用于计算所述上行信道资源的上行BWP。
应理解，在时域上，网络设备可指示重复R次发送的第一次重复发送的第一跳位于时隙m。应理解，如果上行信道是PUCCH，那么有DCI调度PDSCH。假设该PDSCH位于时隙n，网络设备通过DCI指示的HARQ反馈时隙偏移为k，那么m＝n+k。如果上行信道是PUSCH，那么有DCI调度PUSCH。假设网络设备发送的DCI位于时隙a，该DCI中的TDRA域指示的PUSCH时隙偏移为k2，那么m＝a+k2。
由于低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道时，可采用跨时隙跳频传输方式发送上行信道。跨时隙跳频传输方式，例如为第一传输方式或第二传输方式或第三传输方式，均规定一个上行信道的第一跳的结束符合和第二跳的起始符号之间间隔一定数量的符号，以进行频率调谐。但是，当低复杂度终端设备在配置的资源上重复多次发 送上行信道。相邻两次发送中，第i次的上行信道的第二跳的最后一个符号与第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳的第一个符号之间所间隔的一定数量的符号可能不足够低复杂度终端设备进行频率调谐。这种情况下，低复杂度终端设备从第i次的上行信道的第二跳到第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳，显然没有必要进行跳频，以避免丢弃符号造成的性能损失。
为此，本申请实施例在重复多次发送上行信道时，可确定是否在第i次的上行信道的第二跳到第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳之间进行跳频，以尽量避免丢弃符号造成的性能损失。应理解，重复R次中的第一次的上行信道的第一跳在时隙m发送。根据低复杂度终端设备采用的跨时隙传输方式的不同，第一次的上行信道的第二跳可能在时隙m，也可能在时隙m+1或时隙m+2等等，除第一次之外的其他次的上行信道的第一跳位于时隙m+1或时隙m+2等等。为了便于描述，本申请实施例，以重复R次中的第i次的上行信道的第一跳可位于时隙m+h为例，应理解，h为正整数，i大于或等于2。针对时隙m+h，重复R次发送上行信道时，不同次的上行信道占用的时频资源包括以下两种情况。下文中，“mod”表示取模运算，即“h mod x”表示h除以x的余数。
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000031
表示向上取整。
情况一，第i次的上行信道的第二跳到第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳之间进行不跳频。
如果h mod 2＝0，那么低复杂度终端设备在该时隙m+h上，第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000032
次重复发送上行信道，并且发送所述上行信道的第一跳。应理解，在时域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的时域资源是时隙m+h从起始符号S1开始的连续L1个符号。在频域上，如果h mod 4＝0，那么低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源；如果h mod 4＝2，那么低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。
如果h mod 2＝1，那么低复杂度终端设备在该时隙m+h上，第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000033
次重复发送上行信道，并且发送所述上行信道的第二跳，也就是L2个符号。应理解，在时域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的时域资源是该时隙m+h从起始符号S2开始的连续L2个符号。在频域上，如果h mod 4＝1，那么低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源；如果h mod 4＝3，那么低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。关于S2的确定可参考前述第三传输方式的实施例的相关内容。
举例来说，请参见图18，图18以S2＝S1+L1，R＝2为例。即低复杂度终端设备重复发送2次上行信道。低复杂度终端设备可在4个时隙内完成2次重复发送。例如，这4个时隙内的前2个时隙用于发送上行信道U，后2个时隙用于发送上行信道W。应理解，上行信道W是上行信道U的重复。需要说明的是，上行信道W是上行信道U的重复指的是上行信道W携带的内容和上行信道U携带的内容相同。但是上行信道W和上行信道U的其余参数，例如冗余版本(redundancy version，RV)可能不同。
如图18所示，h＝2，那么第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000034
次，也就是第2次发送上行信道W的第一跳的时隙为时隙m+2。那么时隙m用于发送上行信道U的第一跳，时隙m+1用于发送上行信道U的第二跳，时隙m+3用于发送上行信道W的第二跳。在频域上，由于h mod 4＝2，所以低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。即低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+2上从符号S1开始，在第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源发送L1个符号。针对一个上行信道来说，低复杂度终端设备采用跨时隙传输方式发送上行信道，所以第2次发送上行信道W的第二跳的时隙为时隙m+3。在频域上，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+3上从符号S2开始，在第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源发送L2个符号。
情况二，第i次的上行信道的第二跳到第i+1次的上行信道的第一跳之间进行跳频。
如果h mod 2＝0，那么低复杂度终端设备在该时隙m+h上，第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000035
次重复发送上行信道，并且发送所述上行信道的第一跳。在时域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的时域资源是该时隙m+h从起始符号S1开始的连续L1个符号。在频域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。
如果h mod 2＝1，那么低复杂度终端设备在该时隙m+h上，第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000036
次重复发送上行信道，并且发送所述上行信道的第二跳，也就是L2个符号。在时域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的时域资源是该时隙m+h从起始符号S2开始的连续L2个符号。在频域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。关于S2的确定可参考前述第三传输方式的实施例的相关内容。
举例来说，请参见图19，图19以S2＝S1+L1，R＝2为例。即低复杂度终端设备重复发送2次上行信道。低复杂度终端设备可在4个时隙内完成2次重复发送。例如，这4个时隙内的前2个时隙用于发送上行信道U，后2个时隙用于发送上行信道W。应理解，上行信道W是上行信道U的重复。
如图19所示，h＝2，那么第
Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-000037
次，也就是第2次发送上行信道W的第一跳的时隙为时隙m+2。那么时隙m用于发送上行信道U的第一跳，时隙m+1用于发送上行信道U的第二跳，时隙m+3用于发送上行信道W的第二跳。在频域上，低复杂度终端设备所使用的频域资源是从第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源。即低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+2上从符号S1开始，在第一PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源发送L1个符号。针对一个上行信道来说，低复杂度终端设备采用跨时隙传输方式发送上行信道，所以第2次发送上行信道W的第二跳的时隙为时隙m+3。在频域上，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+3上从符号S2开始，在第二PRB开始的连续Nf个PRB资源发送L2个符号。
在具体实现过程中，网络设备可为低复杂度终端设备配置按照情况一或情况二发送上行信道。或者，网络设备通过动态信令的方式指示低复杂度终端设备配置按照情况一或情况二发送上行信道。
或者，可预定义低复杂度终端设备配置按照情况一或情况二发送上行信道。示例性的，为了避免丢弃符号造成的性能损失，可预定义低复杂度终端设备配置按照情况一发送上行信道。示例性的，假设第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的最后一个符号，与用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的第一个符号之间间隔Q个符号。为了避免丢弃符号造成的性能损失，同时，又为了可以尽量多跳频以获得更大的跳频增益。如果Q大于或等于N，那么低复杂度终端设备可按照情况二发送上行信道。也就是，如果Q大于或等于N，用于第i+1次发送某个上行信道的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送该上行信道的第一跳的频域资源相同。相反，如果Q小于N，那么低复杂度终端设备可按照情况一发送上行信道。也就是，用于第i+1次发送某个上行信道的第一跳的频域资源与用于第i次发送该上行信道的第二跳的频域资源相同。
作为一种实现方式，在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内执行跳频发送时，如果N/L大于(或大于或等于)预设阈值，则终端设备按照如上所述的第一传输方式、或第二传输方式、或第三传输方式发送上行信道。如果N/L小于或等于(或小于)所述预设阈值，则终端设备仍然按照时隙内跳频的传输方式发送上行信道。
前述的第一传输方式、第二传输方式以及第三传输方式旨在针对低复杂度终端设备超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送一个上行信道的应用场景，规定上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳之间间隔一定数量的符号。即为低复杂度终端设备留有进行频率调谐的时间，尽 量减少由于低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道时，由于进行频率调谐导致的上行信道传输性能的下降。
本申请实施例再提供另一种传输方式来避免由于频率调谐造成的上行信道发送的性能损失。
考虑到低复杂度终端设备由于频率调谐造成的性能损失，低复杂度终端设备可能不支持时隙内跳频的传输方式，且低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道。针对这种情况，本申请实施例中的低复杂终端设备才采用第四传输方式发送上行信道。该第四传输方式为：低复杂度终端设备重复R次发送上行信道，在第m个时隙内进行重复R次中的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时隙内进行重复R次中的第i+1次发送上行信道U，上行信道U是上行信道W的重复。在第m个时隙内用于发送上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在第m+h个时隙内用于发送上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同，在第m个时隙内用于发送上行信道W的符号个数与在第m+h个时隙内用于发送上行信道U的符号个数相同，用于发送上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送上行信道U的频域资源不同。也就是，如果网络设备配置终端设备以时隙内跳频传输方式发送上行信道，那么低复杂度终端设备可通过重复发送2个时隙来发送上行信道，且相邻2次重复发送之间执行时隙间跳频。当然，对正常终端设备来说，仍可通过发送1个时隙来发送上行信道，且采用时隙内跳频的传输方式。另外，针对重复传输，如果网络设备配置终端设备以时隙内跳频传输方式重复发送E次上行信道，那么低复杂度终端设备可通过重复发送2E个时隙来发送上行信道，且相邻2次重复发送之间执行时隙间跳频。当然，对正常终端设备来说，仍可通过重复发送E个时隙来发送上行信道，且相邻2次重复发送之间执行时隙间跳频。
为了便于理解，下面分别以多种可能的场景来介绍第四传输方式。
场景一，上行信道为RACH流程中的Msg3 PUSCH。
应理解，随机接入响应上行授权(RAR UL grant,random access response)或DCI域中的跳频指示域指示终端设备通过跳频的形式发送Msg3 PUSCH(例如，跳频指示域置0)，那么低复杂度终端设备发送1次Msg3 PUSCH，且以不跳频方式发送。
如果随机接入响应上行授权(RAR UL grant,random access response)或DCI域中的跳频指示域指示终端设备通过跳频的形式发送Msg3 PUSCH(例如，跳频指示域置1)。在本申请实施例中，对于低复杂度终端设备来说，如果该低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送Msg3 PUSCH，那么可重复发送2个时隙的Msg3 PUSCH，2个时隙间跳频。
例如，网络设备配置Msg3 PUSCH在1个时隙内的符号长度为L，在1个时隙中的起始符号为S1，S1和L是由RAR UL grant或DCI域中的TDRA域指示的。假设低复杂度终端设备在时隙m内第一次发送Msg3 PUSCH，那么低复杂度终端设备可在时隙m+1内第二次发送Msg3 PUSCH。且在时隙m和时隙m+1发送的Msg3 PUSCH符号长度均为L，在时隙m和时隙m+1中的起始符号均为S1。当RAR UL grant调度Msg3 PUSCH时，有m＝n+k2+delta，n表示承载RAR UL grant的PDSCH所在时隙，k2是RAR UL grant域中的TDRA域指示的时隙偏移，delta是一个预定义的值。当由DCI调度Msg3 PUSCH时，m＝n+k2，n表示承载DCI的PDCCH所在时隙，k2是DCI域中的TDRA域指示的时隙偏移。
低复杂度终端设备在时隙m发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源由RAR UL grant或DCI域中的FDRA域指示。该频域资源指示包括起始PRB编号，例如为第一PRB，以及频域资源宽度，例如为连续的Nf个PRB。应理解，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+1发送的Msg3  PUSCH的频域资源宽度也为连续的Nf个PRB。低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+1发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源起始PRB编号，例如为第二PRB，其中，第二PRB可由第一PRB、频域偏移offset和用于计算跳频范围的BWP带宽共同确定。例如可参见上述的公式(1)。
在可能的实现方式中，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号，以及低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+1发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号也可以根据m适应性变化。例如，如果m是偶数，那么低复杂度终端设备在时隙m发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第一PRB，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+1发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第二PRB。相反，如果m是奇数，那么低复杂度终端设备在时隙m发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第二PRB，低复杂度终端设备在时隙m+1发送的Msg3 PUSCH的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第一PRB。
当然，如果网络设备配置或指示低复杂度终端设备以时隙内跳频方式重复发送R次Msg3 PUSCH。当该低复杂度终端设备不支持时隙内跳频，且在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送Msg3 PUSCH，那么该低复杂度终端设备可通过重复发送R或2R个时隙来发送Msg3 PUSCH，且相邻2次重复发送之间执行时隙间跳频。具体低复杂度终端设备通过重复发送R个时隙来发送Msg3 PUSCH，还是通过2R个时隙来发送Msg3 PUSCH，可以由网络设备预配置或通过动态信令指示。或者也可根据低复杂度终端设备的能力信息或辅助信息来确定。例如，网络设备根据低复杂度终端设备上报的能力信息或辅助信息来确定。或者也可以是预定义的。例如，默认通过2R个时隙来发送Msg3 PUSCH。又例如，如果第i次发送的Msg3 PUSCH的最后一个符号和第i+1次发送的Msg3 PUSCH的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，那么重复发送R个时隙的Msg3 PUSCH；如果第i次发送的Msg3 PUSCH的最后一个符号和第i+1次发送的Msg3 PUSCH的第一个符号之间的间隔小于N，那么重复发送2R个时隙的Msg3 PUSCH。
场景二，上行信道为RACH流程中的Msg4的HARQ反馈的PUCCH。
假设网络设备指示的PUCCH资源的符号长度为L，起始符号为S1。网络设备指示低复杂度终端设备在时隙m发送针对Msg4的HARQ反馈。在本申请实施例中，低复杂度终端设备可在时隙m和时隙m+1重复发送2个PUCCH。时隙m发送的PUCCH的符号个数和在时隙m+1发送的PUCCH符号个数均为L，在时隙m和时隙m+1中的起始符号均为S1。时隙m和时隙m+1之间以跳频方式发送，即在时隙m，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第一PRB，在时隙m+1，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第二PRB。其中，第一PRB和第二PRB可根据网络设备的指示以及预定义的PRB偏移共同确定。
应理解，场景一和场景二中，如果低复杂度终端设备在相邻两次重复发送PUCCH，第i次发送上行信道U的结束符号和第i+1次发送上行信道W的起始符号之间间隔的符号数Q大于或等于低复杂度终端设备执行跳频即执行频率调谐所需时长对应的符号数N，那么低复杂度终端设备在Q个符号内可完成频率调谐。这种情况下，低复杂终端设备无需更多次重复发送上行信道，即低复杂终端设备可根据网络设备指示的重复次数发送上行信道。例如，网络设备指示低复杂度终端设备重复E次发送上行信道，那么低复杂度终端设备可确定R＝E，即重复发送E次上行信道。例如，在第m个时隙内进行重复E次中的第一次的PUCCH发送。
相反，如果低复杂度终端设备在相邻两次重复发送PUCCH，第i次发送上行信道U的结束符号和第i+1次发送上行信道W的起始符号之间间隔的符号数Q小于低复杂度终端设备执行跳频即执行频率调谐所需时长对应的符号数N。那么即使低复杂度终端设备在Q个符号内不足以完成频率调谐。这种情况下，低复杂终端设备可重复更多次发送上行信道。例如，网络设备指示低复杂度终端设备重复E次发送上行信道，那么低复杂度终端设备可确定R＝2E，即重复发送2E次上行信道。例如，则在第m个时隙内进行重复2E次中的第i次发送PUCCH，在第m+1个时隙内进行重复2E次中的第i+1次发送PUCCH。也就是，每个时隙上发送一个PUCCH，每个时隙上的PUCCH的符号长度均为L，每个时隙中的起始符号均为S1。相邻两个时隙之间以跳频方式发送，即在时隙m，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第一PRB，在时隙m+1，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第二PRB。其中，第一PRB和第二PRB可根据网络设备的指示以及预定义的PRB偏移共同确定。
应理解，如果低复杂度终端设备在相邻两次重复发送PUCCH，第i次发送上行信道U的结束符号和第i+1次发送上行信道W的起始符号之间间隔的符号数Q小于低复杂度终端设备执行跳频即执行频率调谐所需时长对应的符号数N。低复杂度终端设备需要丢弃上行信道U/或上行信道W的部分符号。为了尽量减少对PUCCH的发送性能的影响，本申请实施例可根据需要丢弃的符号个数占要发送的上行信道的符号个数的比例来确定预设门限。例如预设门限可称为第一取值。第一取值可以是网络设备预配置或者协议预定义的，例如第一取值为10％或20％等。或者第一取值也可以是根据低复杂终端设备上报的能力信息或辅助信息确定的。
相邻两次发送中，低复杂度终端设备丢弃的符号可以是第i次的PUCCH的结尾处的部分符号，也可以是第i+1次的PUCCH的开始处的部分符号。或者，低复杂度终端设备丢弃的符号可以是第i次的PUCCH的结尾处的部分符号，和第i+1次的PUCCH的开始处的部分符号。具体丢弃哪些符号可由网络设备预配置、或协议预定义、或网络设备通过动态信令指示。
作为另一种实现方式，本申请实施例可根据需要丢弃的符号个数占要发送的上行信道的符号个数的比例，来选择是否以四传输方式发送上行信道。例如，如果N/L大于或等于预设门限，那么采用第四传输方式。
场景三，网络设备指示低复杂度终端设备以时隙内跳频方式发送PUCCH。低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送PUCCH。
假设网络设备指示的PUCCH资源的符号长度为L，起始符号为S1。低复杂度终端设备可在第m个时隙发送1个时隙的PUCCH。或者，也可以在第m个时隙发送一次PUCCH，在第m+1个时隙再发送一次PUCCH，即重复发送2次PUCCH。
在可能的实现方式中，如果N/L大于或等于预设门限，则在第m个时隙和第m+h个时隙内重复2次发送PUCCH。也就是，每个时隙上发送一个PUCCH，每个时隙上的PUCCH的符号长度均为L，每个时隙中的起始符号均为S1。相邻两个时隙之间以跳频方式发送，即在时隙m，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第一PRB，在时隙m+1，低复杂度终端设备采用的频域资源的PRB编号为第二PRB。其中，第一PRB和第二PRB可根据网络设备的指示以及预定义的PRB偏移共同确定。
如果N/L小于所述预设门限，则在第m个时隙内发送一次PUCCH。也就是，低复杂 度终端设备仍然以时隙内跳频的传输方式发送PUCCH，且只在时隙m发送一次PUCCH。该PUCCH的第一跳的起始符号为S1，长度为L个符号中的前L1个符号。该PUCCH的第二跳起始符号为S2，长度为L-L1个符号。第一跳所采用的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第一PRB，频域宽度为Nf个PRB，第二跳所采用的频域资源的起始PRB编号为第二PRB，频域宽度为Nf个PRB。
如上述本申请实施例提供的四种新的传输方式，第一传输方式、第二传输方式以及第三传输方式针对低复杂度终端设备超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送一个上行信道的应用场景，规定上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳之间间隔一定数量的符号。即为低复杂度终端设备留有进行频率调谐的时间，尽量减少由于低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围发送上行信道时进行频率调谐导致的上行信道传输性能的下降。第四传输方式针对网络设备为终端设备配置以时隙内跳频传输方式发送上行信道的场景，规定了低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内按照重复R次并按照时隙间跳频的传输方式发送上行信道。由于相邻两次之间也间隔一定数量的符号，所以可减少由于进行频率调谐导致的上行信道传输性能的下降，并在重复发送时会发送更多的符号，因此第四传输方式通过使用更多的时频资源来避免上行信道传输性能的下降。
前述介绍了本申请实施例新引入的上行信道的四种传输方式，那么结合目前上行信道已有的传输方式，即时隙内跳频传输和时间间跳频传输方式以及非跳频传输方式，共有7种上行信道的传输方式。结合上述实施例以及相关附图，下文介绍，终端设备进行PUCCH的接收或上行信道的发送究竟使用这7种上行信道的传输方式中的哪种传输方式，例如可由终端设备自行确定，也可以由网络设备指示终端设备使用哪种传输方式。
下面请参见图20，示出了本申请实施例提供的上行信道的传输方法。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图1所示的网络架构为例。另外，该方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片系统。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片系统。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。其中，网络设备例如为基站。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是终端设备为例。如果将本实施例应用在图1所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的网络设备可以是图1所示的网络架构中的网络设备。需要说明的是，本申请实施例只是以通过网络设备和终端设备执行为例，并不限制于这两种通信装置。例如，本申请实施例也可以通过终端设备和终端设备执行，即通信的两端均为终端设备。
S2001、终端设备确定用于传输上行信道的目标传输方式。
在本申请实施例中，存在用于传输上行的7种传输方式，这7种传输方式分别为第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式、第四传输方式、时隙内跳频传输方式，以及时隙间跳频传输方式和非跳频传输方式。终端设备在进行上行信道接收或上行信道发送之前，可从多种传输方式中确定用于上行信道接收或上行信道发送的第一传输方式。当然，如果网络设备预配置或者协议预定义好终端设备采用何种传输方式，那么终端设备无需从多种传输方式选择。例如针对低复杂度终端设备，网络设备预配置或者协议预定义低复杂度终端设备采用第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式，或第四传输方式发送上行信道。那么低复杂度终端设备默认采用被配置或预定义的传输方式。
其中，多种传输方式可包括上述7种传输方式中的至少两种传输方式。所述至少两种传输方式至少包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式、第四传输方式的任意一种，以及时隙内跳频传输方式，以及时隙间跳频传输方式和非跳频传输方式的任意一种。
例如，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及非跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及时隙内跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及时隙间跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及非跳频传输方式和时隙内跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及非跳频传输方式和时隙间跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及时隙内跳频传输方式和时隙间跳频传输方式。或者，多种传输方式包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式和第四传输方式中的一种或多种，以及非跳频传输方式、时隙内跳频传输方式和时隙间跳频传输方式。
本申请实施例从多种传输方式确定目标传输方式包括以下两种确定方式：
第一种确定方式：终端设备可根据网络设备的指示确定目标传输方式。
示例性的，S2002、网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，相应的，终端设备接收该第一指示信息。该第一指示信息可用于指示多种传输方式中的任意一种传输方式，例如第一传输方式。第一指示信息可承载于在无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令，媒体访问控制元素(media access control control element，MAC CE)信令或下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)信令等中的一种或多种。上述一个或多个字段可以是RRC信令已定义的字段、MAC CE信令已定义的字段或者DCI信令已定义的字段，也可以是新定义的RRC字段、MAC CE字段或DCI字段，对此，本申请实施例不作限制。当然，第一指示信息也可以承载在新定义的信令。
第一指示信息可占用一个或多个比特，不同比特状态对应不同的传输方式。
例如，多种传输方式包括两种传输方式，第一指示信息占用1个比特。例如多种传输方式包括第一传输方式和时隙内跳频传输方式，这1个比特的状态为“0”可指示第一传输方式，这1个比特的状态为“1”可指示时隙内跳频传输方式。或者，这1个比特的状态为“0”可指示时隙内跳频传输方式，这1个比特的状态为“1”可指示第一传输方式。
又例如，多种传输方式包括至少三种传输方式，第一指示信息可占用至少2比特。示例性的第一指示信息的具体指示内容可参考表7。
表7
第一信息的比特状态 指示内容
00 第一传输方式
01 第二传输方式
10 时隙内跳频传输方式
11 时隙间跳频传输方式，或预留，或用作其他指示
S2003、终端设备向网络设备发送能力信息，相应的，网络设备接收该能力信息，该能力信息用于指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。这里的跨时隙传输方式可包括第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式以及第四传输方式中的一种或多种。
能力信息用于指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式，也可理解为，能力信息能够反馈终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。不同的终端设备的能力不同，例如，有些终端设备支持第一传输方式，有些终端设备不支持第一传输方式。如果网络设备指示不支持第一传输方式的终端设备采用第一传输方式传输上行信道，显然不合适。所以本申请实施例中，网络设备可根据终端设备上报的能力信息从多种传输方式中确定目标传输方式，以避免确定的传输方式与终端设备的能力不匹配。当然，终端设备没有向网络设备发送能力信息，可默认终端设备支持跨时隙传输方式。也就是S2003是可选的步骤，在图20中以虚线进行示意。另外，能力信息可复用目前终端设备的能力信息。或者能力信息也可以不复用目前终端设备的能力信息，例如称为辅助信息，用于指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。
另外，能力信息还可以包括一种或多种参数，用于辅助终端设备确定如何使用跨时隙传输方式。例如这一种或多种参数用于指示终端设备采用第一传输方式中的情况一到情况三中的哪种情况。或者，这一种或多种参数用于指示终端设备采用第二传输方式中的情况四到情况六中的哪种情况。或者，这一种或多种参数用于指示终端设备采用第三传输方式中的情况七到情况九中的哪种情况。或者，这一种或多种参数用于指示终端设备在N/L大于或等于预设门限时，采用第四传输方式。
与第一指示信息类似，能力信息也可承载于在RRC信令，MAC CE信令或UCI信令等中的一种或多种。上述一个或多个字段可以是RRC信令已定义的字段、MAC CE信令已定义的字段或者UCI信令已定义的字段，也可以是新定义的RRC字段、MAC CE字段或UCI字段，对此，本申请实施例不作限制。当然，能力信息也可以承载在新定义的信令。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例对能力信息的具体实现不作限制，能力信息可直接指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。例如，第一指示信息和能力信息可承载于不同信令，或者同一条信令的不同字段。能力信息可间接指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。例如，可通过指示承载能力信息的字段是否存在，来指示终端设备是否支持跨时隙传输方式。如果承载能力信息的字段存在，可指示终端设备不支持跨时隙传输方式；相应的，如果承载能力信息的字段不存在，可指示终端设备支持跨时隙传输方式。
第二种确定方式：终端设备根据预先规定的规则(也称为预设规则)确定目标传输方式。
预设规则可为低复杂度终端设备采用第一传输方式、第二传输方式、第三传输方式，或第四传输方式发送上行信道。预设规则可以是根据低复杂终端设备的能力信息确定目标传输方式。
应理解，由于终端设备可根据预设规则确定目标传输方式，那么S2002是可选的步骤，所以在图20中以虚线进行示意。
应理解，网络设备也可以根据预先规则接收来自终端设备的上行信道。例如，网络设备确定接收来自低复杂度终端设备的上行信道，那么网络设备以预设规则对应的目标传输方式接收来自低复杂度终端设备的上行信道。如果预设规则为根据低复杂终端设备的能力信息确定目标传输方式。那么网络设备可根据低复杂终端设备上报的能力信息来确定目标传输方式，从而以目标传输方式接收来自低复杂度终端设备的上行信道。
S2004、终端设备根据所确定的目标传输方式发送上行信道，相应的，网络设备接收该上行信道。
终端设备确定发送上行信道采用的目标传输方式，以目标传输方式发送上行信道。网络设备以目标传输方式接收来自终端设备的上行信道。
例如，低复杂度终端设备确定采用第一传输方式发送上行信道。由于第一传输方式中，任意一个上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有例如14×n个符号，这样即使低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，也可以在14×n个符号内进行频率调谐。这样可降低对上行信道的发送影响，尽量避免低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。而且任意一个PUCCH的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔14×n个符号，低复杂度终端设备可确定PUCCH的第二跳的起始符号的编号与正常终端设备采用时隙内跳频传输方式发送PUCCH时的第二跳的起始符号的编号相同。这样网络设备可通过系统消息统一配置公共PUCCH资源(格式)，无需单独为低复杂度终端设备配置单独的PUCCH格式，可减少信令开销和资源开销。例如沿用目前PUCCH格式为终端设备配置PUCCH资源，那么每个时隙的候选PUCCH符号位置仍然不变，可减少用于发送PUCCH的资源，也不会占用为其他终端设备分配的资源。
例如，低复杂度终端设备确定采用第二传输方式发送上行信道。由于第二传输方式中，任意一个上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有X个符号，这样即使低复杂度终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，也可以在X个符号内进行频率调谐。这样可降低对上行信道的发送影响，尽量避免低复杂度终端设备的上行信道传输性能的下降。其中，X可以小于14，也就是上行信道的第一跳和上行信道的第二跳可位于同一个时隙内。这样可降低发送上行信道的时延。
例如，低复杂度终端设备确定采用第三传输方式发送上行信道。由于第三传输方式中，规定了上行信道的第一跳的结束符号编号S1和上行信道的第二跳的起始符号的编号S2之间的关系。相当于，间接指示了上行信道的第一跳和第二跳之间间隔有一定数量的符号。且S2可从多个集合，例如[S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]中选择，更为灵活。
又例如，低复杂度终端设备确定采用第四传输方式发送上行信道，规定了不支持时隙内跳频传输方式的低复杂度终端设备，在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送上行信道，如何重复发送上行信道的方式。
在可能的场景中，如果上行信道的符号个数为奇数，可能会造成不同终端设备之间的发送的符号存在部分重叠，即造成终端设备之间的干扰。举例来说，请参见图21，低复杂度终端设备1发送上行信道的时频资源示意图。图21以上行信道的符号个数L＝11为例。那么在时隙m内的上行信道的第一跳的符号个数L1是5，在时隙m+1内的上行信道的第 二跳的符号个数L2是6。如图21所示，X＝9。这种情况下，在如图21所示的第一区域内的时频资源上，无论发送终端设备2的上行信道的第一跳还是发送终端设备2的上行信道的第二跳，都会和低复杂度终端设备1的上行信道的第二跳的最后一个符号重叠，如图22所示。即造成终端设备间的干扰。
然而，本申请实施例提供的第一传输方式、第二传输方式和第三传输方式，可灵活确定X，无论上行信道的符号个数是奇数，还是偶数，都可以使得低复杂度终端设备和正常终端设备更好的复用时频资源，避免不同终端设备之间的发送的符号存在部分重叠，进而避免终端设备之间的干扰。
在可能的场景中，不同终端设备的时频资源可以相同，可通过码分复用的方式区分不同终端设备的信号。以PUCCH为例，针对PUCCH格式1，调制后的数据信号要和特定的正交序列(orthogonal sequence)相乘，而不同的终端设备使用的正交序列不同，从而，不同终端设备的信号之间可以实现正交发送，因此可以采用相同的时频资源，而在码域对不同终端设备的信号进行区分。但是，正交发送的前提是，不同终端设备的数据信号所在的OFDM符号得是相同的。如果一个终端设备的数据信号所在的OFDM符号和另一个UE的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DM-RS)所在的OFDM符号相同，由于数据信号和解调参考信号显然不是正交发送的，则不同DM-RS,的信号之间就会干扰，影响上行信道的信道估计和解调性能，从而影响DM-RS,的上行链路性能。
例如，终端设备1发送的第二跳的OFDM符号和终端设备2发送的第一跳的OFDM符号使用的时频资源相同。终端设备1和终端设备2可能都是低复杂度终端设备。也可能终端设备1是低复杂度终端设备，终端设备2是正常终端设备。或者，终端设备1是正常终端设备，终端设备2是低复杂度终端设备。当PUCCH的符号个数等于某个取值时，PUCCH的第一跳的OFDM符号中用于发送DM-RS的OFDM符号个数和PUCCH的第二跳的OFDM符号中用于发送DM-RS的OFDM符号个数不同。PUCCH的第一跳的OFDM符号中用于发送数据的OFDM符号个数和PUCCH的第二跳的OFDM符号中用于发送数据的OFDM符号个数不同。例如，所述PUCCH的符号个数等于6，10或14。也就是说，当L满足L/2等于奇数。另外，由于PUCCH格式1中，假设PUCCH发送的L个符号的第一个OFDM符号编号为0，往后编号依次加1。则编号为偶数的OFDM符号承载DM-RS信号，也就是这样的OFDM符号为DM-RS OFDM符号，其他的OFDM符号为承载数据信号的符号，即数据OFDM符号。那么用于发送DM-RS的OFDM符号和用于发送数据的OFDM符号在第一跳中的相对符号位置和在第二跳中的相对符号位置分别不同，可能刚好错开，如图23所示。如果终端设备1发送的第二跳OFDM符号和终端设备2发送的第一跳的OFDM符号使用的时频资源相同，那么不同终端设备的数据信号所在的OFDM符号就是不同的，而，终端设备1的数据信号所在的OFDM符号和终端设备2的DM-RS所在的OFDM符号反而是相同的，这会增加终端设备之间的干扰，影响终端设备的上行链路性能。
然而，本申请实施例提供跨时隙跳频传输方式中，可保证终端设备1发送的第一跳OFDM符号和终端设备2发送的第一跳的OFDM符号使用的时频资源相同，或者，终端设备1发送的第二跳OFDM符号和终端设备2发送的第二跳的OFDM符号使用的时频资源相同。所以在不同终端设备的时频资源相同的情况下，通过码分复用的方式区分不同终端设备的信号，也可以减少终端设备之间的干扰，尽量降低对终端设备的上行链路性能的 影响。
在可能的场景中，多个低复杂度终端设备共享PUCCH资源。以低复杂度终端设备1、低复杂度终端设备2和低复杂度终端设备3共享PUCCH资源为例。网络设备预配置低复杂度终端设备1、低复杂度终端设备2和低复杂度终端设备3的上行信道在时隙中的起始符号均为S1。如果网络设备将低复杂度终端设备1和低复杂度终端设备3调度在时隙m发送上行信道的第一跳OFDM符号，在时隙m+1发送上行信道的第二跳OFDM符号。如图24所示，为了避免不同终端设备的上行信道的时频资源重叠，网络设备就不能将低复杂度终端设备2调度在时隙m+1发送上行信道的第一跳OFDM符号。因此，低复杂度终端设备2只能被调度在之后的时隙，这会增加低复杂度终端设备2的时延。
然而，本申请实施例提供的跨时隙跳频传输方式中，在避免不同终端设备的上行信道的时频资源重叠的基础上，所以能够降低低复杂度终端设备2的调度时延。
举例来说，请参见图25，每个时隙都存在至少2个第一跳时频资源。在避免不同终端设备的上行信道的时频资源重叠的基础上，如果网络设备将低复杂度终端设备1和低复杂度终端设备3调度在时隙m发送上行信道的第一跳OFDM符号，在时隙m+1发送上行信道的第二跳OFDM符号。网络设备仍然可以将低复杂度终端设备2调度在时隙m+1发送上行信道的第一跳OFDM符号，所以能够降低低复杂度终端设备2的调度时延。
上述本申请提供的实施例中，分别从终端设备和网络设备之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。其中，网络设备执行的步骤也可以由不同的通信装置来分别实现。例如：第一装置用于从多种传输方式中确定目标传输方式，第二装置用于以所述目标传输方式接收上行信道，也就是说第一装置和第二装置共同完成本申请实施例中网络设备执行的步骤，本申请不限定具体的划分方式。当网络架构中包括一个或多个分布单元(distributed unit，DU)、一个或多个集中单元(centralized unit，CU)和一个或多个射频单元(RU)时，上述网络设备执行的步骤可以分别由DU、CU和RU来实现。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能，终端设备和网络设备可以包括硬件结构和/或软件模块，以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能以硬件结构、软件模块、还是硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。
基于与方法实施例的同一发明构思，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置。下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的通信装置。
图26为本申请实施例提供的通信装置2600的示意性框图。该通信装置2600可以包括处理模块2610和收发模块2620。可选的，还可以包括存储单元，该存储单元可以用于存储指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据。处理模块2610和收发模块2620可以与该存储单元耦合，例如，处理模块2610可以读取存储单元中的指令(代码或者程序)和/或数据，以实现相应的方法。上述各个单元可以独立设置，也可以部分或者全部集成。
一些可能的实施方式中，通信装置2600能够对应实现上述方法实施例中终端设备的行为和功能，例如实现图20的实施例中终端设备执行的方法。例如通信装置2600可以为终端设备，也可以为应用于终端设备中的部件(例如芯片或者电路)，也可以是终端设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分。收发模块2620可以用于执行图20所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图20所示的实施例中的S2002、S2003、S2004，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理 模块2610用于执行如图20所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如图20所示的实施例中的S2001，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一些可能的实施方式中，通信装置2600能够对应实现上述方法实施例中网络设备的行为和功能，例如，实现图20的实施例中网络设备执行的方法。例如通信装置2600可以为网络设备，也可以为应用于网络设备中的部件(例如芯片或者电路)，也可以是网络设备中的芯片或芯片组或芯片中用于执行相关方法功能的一部分。收发模块2620可以用于执行图20所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部接收或发送操作，例如图20所示的实施例中的S2002、S2003、S2004，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。其中，处理模块2610用于执行如图20所示的实施例中由基站所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块2610可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块2620可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件或者通信接口实现。
如图27所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置2700，其中，通信装置2700可以是终端设备，能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能，或者，通信装置2700可以是网络设备，能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能；通信装置2700也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置，或者能够支持网络设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中对应的功能的装置。其中，该通信装置2700可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中，芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
在硬件实现上，上述收发模块2620可以为收发器，收发器集成在通信装置2700中构成通信接口2710。
通信装置2700包括至少一个处理器2720，用于实现或用于支持通信装置2700实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备(基站)或终端设备的功能。具体参见方法示例中的详细描述，此处不做赘述。
通信装置2700还可以包括至少一个存储器2730，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器2730和处理器2720耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式，用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器2720可能和存储器2730协同操作。处理器2720可能执行存储器2730中存储的程序指令和/或数据，以使得通信装置2700实现相应的方法。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。需要说明的是，存储器2730不是必须的，所以在图27中以虚线进行示意。
通信装置2700还可以包括通信接口2710，用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信，从而用于通信装置2700中的装置可以和其它设备进行通信。示例性地，当该通信装置为终端时，该其它设备为网络设备；或者，当该通信装置为网络设备时，该其它设备为终端。处理器2720可以利用通信接口2710收发数据。通信接口2710具体可以是收发器。
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口2710、处理器2720以及存储器2730之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图27中以存储器2730、处理器2720以及通信接口2710之间通过总线2740连接，总线在图27中以粗线表示，其它部件之间的连接方式，仅是进行示意性说明，并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图27中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
在本申请实施例中，处理器2720可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件，可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。
在本申请实施例中，存储器2730可以是非易失性存储器，比如硬盘(hard disk drive，HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive，SSD)等，还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory)，例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory，RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置，用于存储程序指令和/或数据。
需要说明的是，上述实施例中的通信装置可以是终端也可以是电路，也可以是应用于终端中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端功能的组合器件、部件等。当通信装置是终端时，收发模块可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块可以是处理器，例如：中央处理模块(central processing unit，CPU)。当通信装置是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块可以是射频单元，处理模块可以是处理器。当通信装置是芯片系统时，收发模块可以是芯片系统的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片系统的处理器。
图28示出了一种简化的通信装置的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图28中，以通信装置是基站作为例子。该基站可应用于如图1所示的系统中，可以为图1中的网络设备，执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。
该通信装置2800可包括收发器2810、存储器2821以及处理器2822。该收发器2810可以用于通信装置进行通信，如用于发送或接收上述第一指示信息，或能力信息等。该存储器2821与所述处理器2822耦合，可用于保存通信装置2800实现各功能所必要的程序和数据。该处理器2822被配置为支持通信装置2800执行上述方法中相应的功能，所述功能可通过调用存储器2821存储的程序实现。
具体的，该收发器2810可以是无线收发器，可用于支持通信装置2800通过无线空口进行接收和发送信令和/或数据。收发器2810也可被称为收发单元或通信单元，收发器2810可包括一个或多个射频单元2812以及一个或多个天线2811，其中，射频单元如远端射频单元(remote radio uLit，RRU)或者有源天线单元(active aLteLLa uLit，AAU)，具体可用于射频信号的传输以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，该一个或多个天线具体可用于进行射频信号的辐射和接收。可选的，收发器2810可以仅包括以上射频单元，则此时通信装置2800可包括收发器2810、存储器2821、处理器2822以及天线2811。
存储器2821以及处理器2822可集成于一体也可相互独立。如图28所示，可将存储器2821以及处理器2822集成于通信装置2800的控制单元2820。示例性的，控制单元2820可包括LTE基站的基带单元(basebaLd uLit，BBU)，基带单元也可称为数字单元(digital uLit，DU)，或者，该控制单元2820可包括5G和未来无线接入技术下基站中的分布式单元(distribute uLit，DU)和/或集中单元(ceLtralized uLit，CU)。上述控制单元2820可由一个或多个天线面板构成，其中，多个天线面板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络)，多个天线面板也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络，5G网络或其他网络)。所述存储器2821和处理器2822可以服务于一个或多个天线面板。 也就是说，可以每个天线面板上单独设置存储器2821和处理器2822。也可以是多个天线面板共用相同的存储器2821和处理器2822。此外每个天线面板上可以设置有必要的电路，如，该电路可用于实现存储器2821以及处理器2822的耦合。以上收发器2810、处理器2822以及存储器2821之间可通过总线(bus)结构和/或其他连接介质实现连接。
基于图28所示结构，当通信装置2800需要发送数据时，处理器2822可对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频单元，射频单元将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式进行发送。当有数据发送到通信装置2800时，射频单元通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器2822，处理器2822将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
基于如图28所示结构，收发器2810可用于执行以上由收发模块2620所执行的步骤。和/或，处理器2822可用于调用存储器2821中的指令以执行以上由处理模块2610所执行的步骤。
图29示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。为了便于理解和图示方便，图29中，该终端设备以手机作为例子。如图29所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对该车载单元进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到该设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图29中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为该装置的收发单元，将具有处理功能的处理器视为该装置的处理单元。如图29所示，该装置包括收发单元2910和处理单元2920。收发单元2910也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元2920也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元2910中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元2910中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元2910包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元2910有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元2910用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元2920用于执行上述方法实施例中终端上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2910可以用于执行图20所示的实施例中的S2002、S2003，S2004，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其 中，所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口；处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，具体的，通信系统包括网络设备和终端设备，或者还可以包括更多个网络设备和多个终端设备。示例性的，通信系统包括用于实现上述图20的相关功能的网络设备和终端设备。
所述网络设备分别用于实现上述图20相关网络部分的功能。所述终端设备用于实现上述图20相关终端设备的功能。具体请参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述，这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图20中网络设备执行的方法；或者当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图20中终端设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品，包括指令，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图20中网络设备执行的方法；或者当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行图20中终端设备执行的方法。
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，还可以包括存储器，用于实现前述方法中网络设备或终端的功能；或者用于实现前述方法中网络设备和终端的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
应理解，本申请实施例中的术语“系统”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a和b，a和c，b和c，或a、b和c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度。例如，第一非跳频传输方式和第二非跳频传输方式，只是为了区分不同的非跳频传输方式，而并不是表示这两种非跳频传输方式的优先级、或者重要程度等的不同。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的 划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (24)

  1. 一种上行信道的发送方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定目标传输方式，并以所述目标传输方式发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式为第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式；其中，
    所述第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，其中，用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，所述X等于P×n，所述P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数，所述n为正整数，所述m和所述h为正整数；
    所述第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道，其中，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，所述m为正整数，所述h为0或正整数；所述X与L和N相关，和/或，所述X与子载波间隔SCS相关；所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数，所述N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数；
    所述第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，所述L1个符号中的第一个符号在所述第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，所述L2个符号中的第一个符号在所述第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2，所述m和所述h为正整数，所述S2为第一集合中的元素，所述第一集合为如下任一集合：
    [S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
    Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-100001
    L2＝L-L1，
    Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-100002
    表示向下取整，所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，其中，
    在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，所述X等于所述P；
    在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述X大于或等于所述P的2倍；或者，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送所述上行信道的最小符号个数，所述X等于所述P。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标传输方式为所述第二传输方式，所述X满足如下的一种或多种：
    在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，所述X＝N或所述X大于N；
    在L+N大于P的情况下，所述X大于或等于P×n，所述n为正整数；或者，
    在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，所述X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数；
    其中，所述P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。
  4. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标传输方式为所述第三传输方式， 所述h＝1，所述S2满足：
    在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，所述S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素；
    在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，所述S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素；
    在P-L1小于N的情况下，所述S2＝S1+L1。
  5. 如权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，确定目标传输方式，包括：
    从多种传输方式中确定所述目标传输方式，所述多种传输方式还包括非跳频传输方式、时间单元内跳频传输方式，以及时间单元间跳频传输方式中的一种或多种；
    所述非跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以不跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
    所述时间单元内跳频传输方式为：在一个时间单元内以跳频的方式发送所述上行信道；
    所述时间单元间跳频传输方式为：重复E次发送上行信道，在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复E次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道A，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复E次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道B，所述上行信道B承载的信息是所述上行信道A承载的信息的重复，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道A的起始符号的编号，与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道B的起始符号的编号相同，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道A的符号个数与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道B的符号个数相同，用于发送所述上行信道A的频域资源和用于发送所述上行信道B的频域资源不同，所述m和所述h为正整数。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，从多种传输方式确定所述目标传输方式，包括：
    基于预设规则从所述多种传输方式确定所述目标传输方式，所述预设规则为：终端设备在超过第一带宽阈值的范围内发送所述上行信道，所述目标传输方式为所述第一传输方式，或所述第二传输方式，或所述第三传输方式。
  7. 如权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道的第一跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为第一频域位置，在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道的第二跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为第二频域资源，其中，所述第一频域位置和/或所述第二频域位置是根据来自网络设备的指示信息确定的，所述指示信息用于指示预配置的用于发送所述上行信道的第一跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为所述第二频域位置，以及用于指示预配置的用于发送所述上行信道的第二跳的频域资源的起始频域位置为所述第一频域位置。
  8. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，终端设备重复R次发送上行信道，所述R为大于或等于2的正整数，所述R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在所述R次重复发送中，用于第i次发送上行信道U的第二跳的最后一个符号，与用于第i+1次发送上行信道W的第一跳的第一个符号之间间隔Q个符号，所述上行信道W承载的信息是所述上行信道U承载的信息的重复；
    在所述Q大于或等于所述N的情况下，用于发送所述上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于发送所述上行信道U的第二跳的频域资源不同；
    在所述Q小于所述N的情况下，用于发送所述上行信道W的第一跳的频域资源与用于发送所述上行信道U的第二跳的频域资源相同。
  9. 如权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向网络设备发送能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示是否支持所述第一传输方式、所述 第二传输方式以及所述第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。
  10. 一种上行信道的发送方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备确定目标传输方式，并以所述目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的消息3物理上行共享信道Msg3 PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了所述终端设备竞争解决标识的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息的物理上行控制信道PUCCH；
    其中，所述R为大于或等于2的正整数，所述第四传输方式为：所述R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U，所述上行信道U承载的信息是所述上行信道W承载的信息的重复，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道W的符号个数与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道U的符号个数相同，用于发送所述上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送所述上行信道U的频域资源不同，所述m和所述h为正整数。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，终端设备确定目标传输方式，包括：
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示重复次数E，所述R和所述E满足如下关系：
    如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，所述R等于所述E；
    如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔小于所述N，所述R等于所述E的2倍；
    其中，所述N表示所述终端设备在N个符号内进行频率调谐。
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述Msg3 PUSCH为：随机接入过程中用于调度所述Msg3 PUSCH的下行控制信息DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
  13. 一种上行信道的接收方法，其特征在于，包括
    生成第一指示信息，并向终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示目标传输方式，所述目标传输方式为第一传输方式、第二传输方式或第三传输方式；其中，
    所述第一传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，其中，用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间间隔X个符号，所述X等于P×n，所述P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数，所述n为正整数，所述m和所述h为正整数；
    所述第二传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内发送所述上行信道的第二跳，所述第一跳和所述第二跳属于同一个上行信道，其中，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，用于发送所述第一跳的符号中的最后一个符号，与用于发送所述第二跳的符号中的第一个符号之间 间隔X个符号，所述m为正整数，所述h为0或正整数；所述X与L和N相关，和/或，所述X与子载波间隔SCS相关；所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数，所述N为终端设备进行频率调谐能够采用的符号个数或最大符号个数；
    所述第三传输方式为：在第m个时间单元内以连续的L1个符号发送所述上行信道的第一跳，在第m+h个时间单元内以连续的L2个符号发送所述上行信道的第二跳，用于发送所述第一跳的频域资源和用于发送所述第二跳的频域资源不同，所述L1个符号中的第一个符号在所述第m个时间单元内的编号为S1，所述L2个符号中的第一个符号在所述第m+h个时间单元内的编号为S2，所述m和所述h为正整数，所述S2为第一集合中的元素，所述第一集合为如下任一集合：
    [S1+L1，S1-L1]，[S1+L1，S1]，[S1，S1-L1]，或者[S1，S1+L1，S1-L1]，其中，
    Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-100003
    L2＝L-L1，
    Figure PCTCN2022085420-appb-100004
    表示向下取整，所述L为所述上行信道的符号个数。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述上行信道对应的SCS小于第一门限的情况下，所述X等于所述P；
    在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述X大于或等于所述P的2倍；或者，在所述上行信道对应的SCS大于或等于所述第一门限的情况下，所述上行信道的符号个数大于或等于用于发送所述上行信道的最小符号个数，所述X等于所述P。
  15. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标传输方式为所述第二传输方式，所述X满足如下的一种或多种：
    在L+N小于或等于P的情况下，所述X＝N或所述X大于N；
    在L+N大于P的情况下，所述X大于或等于P×n，所述n为正整数；或者，
    在L+N大于P×s，且L+N小于或等于P×(s+1)的情况下，所述X大于或等于P×s，s为正整数；
    其中，所述P为所述时间单元包括的符号个数。
  16. 如权利要求13所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标传输方式为所述第三传输方式，所述h＝1，所述S2满足：
    在P-2×L1大于或等于N的情况下，所述S2为[S1、S1+L1，S1-L1]中的元素；
    在P-L1大于或等于N，且P-2×L1小于N的情况下，所述S2为[S1，S1+L1]中的元素；
    在P-L1小于N的情况下，所述S2＝S1+L1。
  17. 如权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息用于指示所述终端设备是否支持所述第一传输方式、所述第二传输方式以及所述第三传输方式中的一种或多种传输方式。
  18. 一种上行信道的发送方法，其特征在于，包括：
    生成第三指示信息，并向终端设备发送所述第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示终端设备以目标传输方式重复R次发送上行信道，所述目标传输方式包括第四传输方式，所述上行信道包括如下至少一种：随机接入过程中的消息3物理上行共享信道Msg3PUSCH、用于发送针对承载了所述终端设备竞争解决标识的物理下行共享信道PDSCH的混合自动重传请求HARQ反馈信息的物理上行控制信道PUCCH；
    其中，所述R为大于或等于2的正整数，所述第四传输方式为：所述R次重复发送中每次发送的所述上行信道承载的信息都相同，在第m个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送 上行信道的第i次发送上行信道W，在第m+h个时间单元内进行所述重复R次发送上行信道的第i+1次发送上行信道U，所述上行信道U承载的信息是所述上行信道W承载的信息的重复，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道W的起始符号的编号，与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道U的起始符号的编号相同，在所述第m个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道W的符号个数与在所述第m+h个时间单元内用于发送所述上行信道U的符号个数相同，用于发送所述上行信道W的频域资源和用于发送所述上行信道U的频域资源不同，所述m和所述h为正整数。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三指示信息用于指示重复次数E，所述R和所述E满足如下关系：
    如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔大于或等于N，所述R等于所述E；
    如果所述第i次发送的所述上行信道W的最后一个符号和所述第i+1次发送的所述上行信道U的第一个符号之间的间隔小于所述N，所述R等于所述E的2倍；
    其中，所述N表示所述终端设备在N个符号内进行频率调谐。
  20. 如权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述Msg3 PUSCH为：随机接入过程中用于调度所述Msg3 PUSCH的下行控制信息DCI或随机接入上行授权RAR UL grant指示以跳频的方式发送的Msg3 PUSCH。
  21. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法。
  22. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置包括处理器和通信接口以及存储器，所述处理器与所述通信接口耦合，用于调用所述存储器中的计算机指令使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法。
  23. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令被执行时，使所述计算机执行如权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法。
  24. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令，当所述计算机指令被执行时，使所述计算机执行如权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/085420 2021-04-09 2022-04-06 一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置 WO2022214006A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110385406.6A CN115209535B (zh) 2021-04-09 2021-04-09 一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
CN202110385406.6 2021-04-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022214006A1 true WO2022214006A1 (zh) 2022-10-13

Family

ID=83546011

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/085420 WO2022214006A1 (zh) 2021-04-09 2022-04-06 一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115209535B (zh)
WO (1) WO2022214006A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117998456A (zh) * 2022-11-03 2024-05-07 维沃移动通信有限公司 通信方法、装置及终端

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018112322A2 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-06-21 Intel IP Corporation Resource allocation and detailed design for new radio (nr) physical uplink control channel (pucch) with multiple slot duration
CN110062474A (zh) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 夏普株式会社 用户设备、基站和相关方法
CN110574298A (zh) * 2017-05-04 2019-12-13 高通股份有限公司 用于可变长度上行链路控制信道的可配置的时隙内跳频
CN110838905A (zh) * 2014-07-11 2020-02-25 寰发股份有限公司 用于窄带运作的发送以及接收的方法
CN111614374A (zh) * 2020-04-15 2020-09-01 北京云智软通信息技术有限公司 多时隙pucch跳频方法及跳频选择装置
WO2020197195A1 (en) * 2019-03-22 2020-10-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for harq-ack feedback of semi-persistent scheduling data, ue, base station, device and medium
IN202047043153A (zh) * 2020-10-05 2020-10-23 Qualcomm Inc
CN112449419A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-03-05 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种跳频方法、装置及设备

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109392106A (zh) * 2017-08-08 2019-02-26 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 随机接入请求的方法及用户设备
WO2019028797A1 (zh) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 华为技术有限公司 一种上行控制信令的传输方法及终端设备、基站
CN112153740A (zh) * 2019-06-28 2020-12-29 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110838905A (zh) * 2014-07-11 2020-02-25 寰发股份有限公司 用于窄带运作的发送以及接收的方法
WO2018112322A2 (en) * 2016-12-16 2018-06-21 Intel IP Corporation Resource allocation and detailed design for new radio (nr) physical uplink control channel (pucch) with multiple slot duration
CN110574298A (zh) * 2017-05-04 2019-12-13 高通股份有限公司 用于可变长度上行链路控制信道的可配置的时隙内跳频
CN110062474A (zh) * 2018-01-19 2019-07-26 夏普株式会社 用户设备、基站和相关方法
WO2020197195A1 (en) * 2019-03-22 2020-10-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for harq-ack feedback of semi-persistent scheduling data, ue, base station, device and medium
CN112449419A (zh) * 2019-08-15 2021-03-05 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种跳频方法、装置及设备
CN111614374A (zh) * 2020-04-15 2020-09-01 北京云智软通信息技术有限公司 多时隙pucch跳频方法及跳频选择装置
IN202047043153A (zh) * 2020-10-05 2020-10-23 Qualcomm Inc

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LENOVO, MOTOROLA MOBILITY: "Enhancements for TB processing over multi-slot PUSCH", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2101002, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-meeting; 20210125 - 20210205, 19 January 2021 (2021-01-19), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051971337 *
NTT DOCOMO, INC.: "Remaining issues for PUSCH enhancements for Rel.16 URLLC", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2000921, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200224 - 20200306, 14 February 2020 (2020-02-14), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051853100 *
ZTE CORPORATION: "Discussion on support of Type A PUSCH repetitions for Msg3", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2106743, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20210816 - 20210827, 7 August 2021 (2021-08-07), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP052041711 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115209535B (zh) 2024-06-07
CN115209535A (zh) 2022-10-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2018171754A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN112996130B (zh) 用于ofdm系统的灵活帧架构的方法以及用户设备
US11129143B2 (en) Wireless communication method, network device, user equipment, and system
CN111587605A (zh) 用于保持针对非许可无线频谱的信道占用率的上行链路信道调度
JP2024045192A (ja) マルチｔｒｐ ｐｄｓｃｈ送信方式の動的インジケーション
US10554794B2 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus in TDD system
JP7399190B2 (ja) 通信方法及び通信装置
WO2022206628A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN111586844A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2022068177A1 (zh) 用于资源调度的通信方法及装置
WO2022194151A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN114071745A (zh) 一种无线接入的方法以及装置
WO2022214006A1 (zh) 一种上行信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2022029711A1 (en) COLLISION AVOIDANCE AND/OR HANDLING OF INVALID SYMBOLS WHEN UTILIZING UPLINK CHANNEL REPETITION TOWARDS MULTIPLE TRPs
TWI826057B (zh) 一種實體上行控制通道的發送方法、接收方法及通信裝置
WO2023051324A1 (zh) 一种随机接入前导的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2023284534A1 (zh) 一种随机接入方法及通信装置
US11115993B2 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and access network device
CN115208533A (zh) 一种物理上行控制信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2022206931A1 (zh) 一种物理上行控制信道的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2019153369A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及设备
WO2022001638A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置
WO2023011097A1 (zh) 反馈信息传输方法及相关装置
WO2024093834A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
EP4216475A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22784072

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22784072

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1